1990 by harken_procare

One of the most rewarding and interesting aspects of our sport and business is its international nature. Sailors from around the world have a common bond that unites them in a casual and friendly spirit. International regattas are common and sailors who travel generally gravitate towards the nearest yacht club or marina to see what is happening in that area and to meet with local sailors to exchange sea stories. Our company dealt internationally almost from the beginning since we were building Olympic class sailboats in our old Vanguard Division and our hardware was used extensively in the Olympics and other international events. Since that time we have established one of the largest and most professional worldwide distribution systems in the marine business. We currently have our own distribution offices in Japan and France. The Mariani family in Argentina produces our hardware under license for South America. In late 1987 we purchased the Barbarossa company in Italy which produces exquisite winches and hardware. We are also primary suppliers to the Soviet Union for their sailing needs and recently completed agreements to supply the Chinese for the Asian Games. The bedrock of our distributor network, however, is the personal and professional relationship we have with the twenty-eight independent Harken distributors around the world. They distribute not only our hardware, but also the knowledge and sewice that is part of a top rate product. Harken employees at all levels of the company count many of these teammates among their closest personal friends. We dedicate this catalog to them and thank them for the incredible growth we have experienced in international sales. Over forty percent of Harken sales go overseas and seventy percent of Harken Italy's product is exported. For you, our customers, these dedicated professionals and the thirty-two US distributors who do the same great job here, are there to help if you need a fitting or advice, want to set up a dealership, plan to equip a maxi boat or Optimist Pram, want to install a furling system, need to take care of a warranty problem, hope to outfit a line of production boats, or just would like to chat about a sailing problem with nice people. Most of us have been together a long time and they not only know the product but the spirit of the company. This catalog is full of new products and information, and by working with our worldwide team, you should be able to get the right hardware for your boat, quickly and at a fair price.

Peter and Olaf Harken Pewaukee

Federico Giua Lomazzo, Italy

l CONTENTS l SMALL BOAT HARDWARE Accessories ................. 38 Bases ..................... 36 Big Bullet Blocks ............ .l8.19 Bullet Blocks ............... .l 6.17 Cam-Matice Cleats ........... 37 Deck Organizers ............ .34.35 Dinghy Blocks ...............20 Fiddle Blocks Little Fiddle Blocks ..........28 3.00"Fiddle Blocks .......... 29 Hexa-Cats" Little Hexa-Cats ............ 30 3.00"Hexa-Cats ............31 Low Profile Triple Blocks .......32 Magic Boxes ................33 Mid-Range Blocks ............ 24 Micro Blocks ................ 14 Ratchet Blocks Hexaratchete 11 + 2 .........27 Little Hexaratchet ........... 26 2.25"Blocks ................ 21 3.00Blocks Racing. Cruising. Wire ....... .22-23 Wire Bullet Blocks ........... .l 6.17 Wire Blocks ................. 15

TRAUELERS Batten Car Systems .......... .98.99 Big Boat Travelers Cars ..................... 86 Controls .................. 88 Track .................... 87 Hi-load Controls ............89 Genoa Lead Cars ............. 97 Mainsheet Sheave Carriers ......94 Maxi Boat Travelers Cars ..................... 92 Controls ..................93 Track .................... 93 Mid-Range Travelers Cars ..................... 83 Controls .................. 85 Track .................... 84 Mini-Maxi Travelers Cars ..................... 90 Controls .................. 91 Track .................... 91 Small Boat Travelers Cars ..................... 80 Controls .................. 82 Track .................... 81 Soinnaker Pole Cars ..........96 ~ i a c kBends ................ 100 Traveler Kits ................ 79 Windward Sheeting Cars .......95

HARKEN WINCHES Standard Winches Electric Self-Tailing ......... .l32.133 Handles ................... 152 Hydraulic Self-Tailing ....... .l34.135 Single Speed ............... 122 Single Speed Self-Tailing ......127 Snubbing .................. 150 Three Speed .............. .l25 .1 26 Three Speed Self-Tailing ......130 Two Speed ............... .l22.124 Two Speed Self-Tailing .l27.129 Wide Body ................ 131

......

Torlon Racing Winches Four Speed ................ 144 Handles ................... 152 Three Speed ............... 138 Three Soeed Self-Tailino ...... 140 Two Sp'eed self.~ailin~". ...... 139 Wide Body Self-Tailing 143 Wide Body Top Cleat~ng ..... .l41.142 Pedestal Systems Gear Boxes ................ 147 Pedestals ................. 145 U-Joints and Drive Shafts .....146 Modular Kits ................ 151

.......

B16 BOAT HARDWARE Accessories ................. 73 Bolts. Nuts and Washers 73 CustomlLimited Production Items .l67.171 Deck Organizers ............. 53 Foot Blocks ................ .50.52 Genoa Lead Cars ............. 97 Padeyes ................... 69 Rudder Bearings and Tubes .... .70.72 Running Backstay Blocks ...... .55.57 Sheaves Big Boat Sheaves .......... .64.65 Halyard Sheaves ............ 67 Hi-Load Sheaves ............ 66 Steering Sheaves and Brackets ................. 68 Spreacher Blocks ............. 54 Stainless Steel Blocks ........ .60.63 Stand-up Blocks ............ .45.48.59 Swivel Blocks .............. .44.49.58 Titanium Stand-up Blocks ......59 Titanium Swivel Blocks ........58

.......

FURLING AND REEFING SYSTEMS Lazy Jacks ......... Sinale Line Reefina ... Small Boat Jib Furling Systems ... Big Boat Furling Unit 0 ............ Unit 1 .................... 107 Unit 1.5 .................. 108 Unit 2 ....................109 Unit 2.5 .................. 110 Unit 3 .................... 111 Unit 4 ................... .l12.113

HARKEN/BARBAROSSA DECK GEAR Backstay Tensioners .......... 158 Genoa Cars ................ .l54.155 Opening Foot Blocks ......... .l56.157 Sheet Jammers .............. 159 Spinnaker Pole End Fittings .... .l60.161 Track ..................... 154 Track Sliders ............... .l54.155 HARDWARE SYSTEMS Genoa Lead Car Systems ...... .l76.177 Mainsheet Systems .......... .l72.173 Traveler Systems ............ .l74.175 Adjustable Backstay Systems .. .l78.179 BOAT SHOES H-2000Boat Shoes .......... .l62.163 HARKEN PROMOTIONAL ITEMS PRICES

...l64.166

................... .l80.186

ADDRESSES ................. 187

251 Earl N~sconsn Avenbe P m e e W sconsln 530.72 Telex 494.0960 Fa* (414) 691.3008 Teepnone (414) 691-3320

'hqpy D a&m

yew

BU!YMI~BBWBuol

L ! q 3

U~IZI!~

qlma 104 wampleq le!??ds s d w pmsIYIO,d lPOq Ua1m3

'SIBO~ uolsns

01 ~ ~ ! n w l d "!llas leoq B!q e S! 43!tl auu!io3 )no

U O ! S ! ~u01sn3 O =~WI!~M WE

so11

ep Ppua4 an ..nw.ud!yr q m ' 3 ! d , q 1 dpo~ al!l 'h&wa u!p.. P spolprnq 4 1 6 u ! m P m W O h!19 woUd 4 1 U0 m ! O A I n W l qlm mlaatl uueor P ' ~ I Y ~IW V 'qaw

ile noh shelds!p moqs ieoq w w e ~ ?aunmr snolngel as041 &!=A

OM,,ms U! QUO

'=!U0 P W l V l y JOI $!q SIPS h ! I ! q ! s h =U WUoN

1 m 3 lSaM IKU sakueu 'II!H ~

EDIIKU U I W I ~ W UUOP I~

err alqehed p m alqerwaJ nunPM 8' 1831.

31a ~ eilowraM auelo hen? 'UUWBII!M Wells wqou W p m a1 W ' P ~ wuapkaai H 'IPWE aww ' W ~ W I E ! n n 'NWq w :s(3npjd m o 10 I@ 6u!M!qs ~qa l q ! s h S! Uels w w l w l q a u 'au!n!m6 E! h l p q!m ~ 4 1 'BA 'Bu!laau!6ua

'sleq 10 101 e spau aq 'Lea0 1.11 ~EBIUWWI~I pue 'lauuowd 10 ~ o w ! p'sum& . d o p peaq S? ssley h m u m PLI11!W uv mMY1

'SWn

mm wu 01 p m L ! l o o ~hl!!e"b ay! B u ! m W JOI

a n ! w & w wa 1a!u am3 p m m d s!uuaa ~

'sued wn~uei!~ pra wnununle 'labs sal -'!'lS lmrl mspeaq qlmmql del wwwUI1~o

YOMIW

ino W wuold IIM

I! 6yllaB pm - amurn p m 'wym 'leqm rpaau oym to 13UI6U!daey 'IOIOU!~~ ualm S! qlnun hyley

snwr mr tyr!qlm w l l e p m mII!M a!lsai ~ s ! u o ! v k a ~ 6u!wcu :p(oq uo noh and oym uawm aq1 a n anH

%I arl6u sm S IIdn lnq 'do6 Cq m! E s p a O N 6~+n, 10 b M us PW h a m eu 8 aloe. ~ 6 %. a !IDue WO .or

WGI.o,

Driver Roy Borgwlrdt battles gridlock in metro Pewaukee as he dos around on his daily R-

adrm wng a w M m m l Sne deSognw an0 ormuced i n s talaIcg an0 oremr p. thoa greal a& )o. read

The asrembii Hepp, and ~ h L-k complete f l ~ l assembly of all of our hardware.

M a h Whitaker supervises tool design and CNC project development and schedules pess w o h tor ~ t a i n l mSteel parts.

and battens. ~en;s a world

7of small boxes and long tubes.

Rose S o m manages the otfse, ovenees payroll and handler ,nsurance when she,s mt being corporate Secretaw.

~ A o r n e rService and handles me tshnical ride of things - pricing, inventory Costing and evetything etre nobody understands.

Browfie Lewir writes for the newsktter and some ads and IS in charge of in-houre photography and me dah m m .

Cral9 Blazer is in charge of winch service and shippmg.

hi;

Ken PI

are

r e s p o,~U,. ,", ,.,.-,,, evev single piece of metal that we sell.

driver. Thmugh capable hands p a s the fortunes at out company

Lmy Post s t o p dog in our research and prototypfng machine rhap

oea n tn e r w n e on a lea Ime. oas r

Computer department head l a y Nelmn had abandoned hlr hope of having his machines Tom Riptey ir an expert on a lathe and heads prcducfim of all custom prodmts.

w IW 01 ine calaog ano a.cnar 01 I-no ca 0, et 116 Dun i b o t k phoning, he's not in.

US D l s t r l b ~ Sales t ~ ~ Manager Bill Mosher a m o e s show schedules and o i a n i m special promotlonr. He chwe the pink hats and green shorts on page 164

:,.

. ~,, % ~ . > .

c. <<.

Werdy Vem works in advertising where she poduces ads. brochures, and manuals.

wohing swialist working mostly with curtom pjwr

Debble Draeger is in chanp of tort accounting and inventwy

Lira M w r is an administrative ~mrrenrzel ouflor assistant to Some of the bigwtgs and the jib reeling and acts as a trainlng resource for furling system and mmplter uses. Dave Swandt wrote l i n l s k and drills

are production enginews r q n s i b t e for bringing you all of

ths E-2 D&k derign program.

the great productr in this catalo~.

track.

d Meet me Harken team. 1

Corndo Bemaxani guides pans through the various stager of marufacturing.

hberto Callassists Gii. mi in the Quality Cmtroi departmall. P i w , p'lcky, guyr.

L,,,,

imRntorycoRP,,t~SeyeS to

make itkm actually in the uaehousl.

Antmio Aldalo is aswaclulst agent. in electrical and hydraulic FQwerBd

I T k team who &le lhe w h c h s a &ratto, Glona Balb'mot. A m b l y Department Manager h e n u t o Ripam~ti.and Patrizia Marwlin.

Slglor Tatarupa heads Lomarm W u n Q f a r m - hes apklally fond of guarding the r h a V a q patch

pmduction and is the special pmjectr man who gets custom p,ojectP out on time,

Ralfaelia v a n o a h ~a a speclallst m pmpanng Itallan gonmment docunents an ~ndlrpensablepersoo

-L,

Carla Amigmi is wmtay of the

and a linguist mice' who is fluent in mote manager' l w u thin ~ most of us have wer

driven, moving pats and c m p m t s amwd Milan Mth a sped that Teo Fabi wwld envy.

Omella Oiacci "

Amelo C a t t m is in chame 01

railor tm Ghr in %IS. communications, and custwn p m ~ t ins ~omno

Lwho Bonassi is thegenius d the drawingboadwho hasdesipnedaurruperb rtandard. ming, and cuslom winches.

Saler Manaser Hervk ~ u r s i k e PaBEk RieupeyTOut manages Hakm o v m our maheting in France. France. Patrick is the expen on ounitting Jwelyne F l c m m u ovthe Dllice !no* l i n t a s t ~ cFrmcn m ~ In.t 1s MO in La -~Racheile. ~.handlino c ~ n d s n c e IO o race6 an0 nr a *a, o class and bmkkeephg and Fitting up with lhe EXalemaroDl n nor spars I me 'QuP.' ~~

M m n o Panpoiini heads shipping while A I M 0 Bonadiman is in charge 01 the w a ~ o u s e .

d a k m e s s i n s and mm6terizs production planning.

Rallaele Vemocchi is S ale Manager d Hahen Italy, lwmer fishing champion, and a friend to everyone.

.can Man n handler rh m *g lal d a r n France ano a an e m m ~ntharsrmo~anorepaI

WARRANTY

All standard Harken products are unconditionally guaranteed to the original purchaser against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of five years from the date of purchase unless otherwise stated in this catalog and except as follows: Swage fittings and rudder bearlngs are guaranteed for two years. Winches are warranteed for three years. Warranty of custom hardware is limited to one year as to materials and workmansh~pbut not as to performance. Twelve meter hardware is covered by special warranty provisions; contact Harken for details. Oefect~veitems should be returned to Harken and Harken shall, at its option, replace or repatr such product. Return of defective products must be accompanied by a letter giving name, address, date of purchase, type of boat. and function of hardware, as well as an explanation of the defect or malfunct~onand the conditions under which the product was being used.

' MAINTENANCE

This warranty does not apply to or include any product that was improperly installed, or improperly maintained, or used under load conditions exceeding the rating or other recommendations published in the Harken catalog, or subjected to misuse, negligence, accident, or subjected to unauthorized modification or repair. Normal wear to shoes: teeth of cam cleats; winch drums and pawls; and wear from wire rope on all equipment is also excluded. THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER IMPLIED, EXPRESSED AND STATUTORY GUARANTEES, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL HARKEN BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. The laws of each state may vary, giving you additional rights, and some of the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you

~ BIG BOAT BLOCKS

All Harken equipment is designed to give years of service with minimal maintenance. but some maintenance is required togive best service. In general, the most important aspect of maintenance is to keep your equipment clean by frequently flushing it with fresh water. In highly corrosive atmospheres, the stainless steel parts may show some brown rings around the holes, rivets, and screws. This discoloration is not serious but may be removed with a fine abrasive. With the exception of winches. grease should not be used on any Harken products.

SMALL BOAT BLOCKS The plastic sideplates and sheaves of small boat blocks are UV stabilized. but they will still turn grey after long exposure to the sun. This discoloration may be removed with a fine abrasive but will not reduce the strength of the blocks and acts to protect the material underneath Flush small boat blocks thoroughly with fresh water. A light spray of a dry lubricant may be used if desired but is generally not required. lnspect blocks periodically for damage, in particular for cracked or elongated shackles. Tape cotter rings to prevent snagging on sheets. Use Loctitee when refastening any nuts. It is best not to leave heavy loads on small boat blocks when they are not being used. This may slightly deform the bearings. Normally they will return to their proper shape after being rotated, but an initial resistance may be felt.

TRAVELER CARS Keep traveler cars clean by flushing frequently with fresh water. They may also be cleaned by flushing with WD-40 or LPS-l. Both of these penetrating lubricants act to remove deposits in the ball races. This is particularly necessary after cars have not been used for a long period of time. Lubricate cars with light lubricants or dry sprays. Keep traveler tracks clean by washing with soap and water. Be careful that sealants or bedding compounds used during installation are not left on the track as they will foul the ball races. lnspect shackles and control block fittings for signs of fatigue. Arrange traveler tackles so that cars don't hit end stops but are stopped by the rope.

Flush blocks thoroughly with fresh water. Big boat sheaves have flushing ports to allow water to reach the bearings. They may also be cleaned by flushing with WD-40 or LPS-1. Both of these penetrating lubricants act to remove deposits in the bearing races. Lubricate blocks with light lubricants or dry spray lubricants. lnspect shackles and shackle post heads for signs of corrosion or deformation. Nylock nuts should not be reused after being removed more than three tlmes. When replacing shackles or bolts be sure to use Harken parts to maintain the proper strength. Big boat bearings are very resistant to deformation but it is not advisable to leave heavy loadson any hardware when the boat isnot sailing.

J I B REEFlNG AND FURLING SYSTEMS Flush the lower unit and halyard swivel with fresh water. Clean by flushing with WO-40 or LPS-l. Both of these penetrating lubricants act to remove deposits in the bearing races. Lubricate with light lubricants or dry spray lubricants. lnspect swage fittings and lower turnbuckle toggle for corrosion or fatigue. Wash foils with soap and water. Foils may be lubricated with dry sprays to ease the raising or lowering of sails. Refer to the owner's manual for detailed maintenance instructions.

WINCHES Winches should be flushed regularly with fresh water. Periodically break winches down and service. Check pawls and springs for wear and inspect bearings, gears and spindles for signs of wear. Winches should be lubricated with grease but over-application of grease can cause salt and water deposits to become trapped in the winch. Use care to insure that drain ports are unobstructed by sealants or grease. Refer to the owner's manual for detailed maintenance instructions.

SHOES Remove insoles and wash separately. Hand or machine wash shoes in lukewarm water using soap or detergent - do not bleach. Air dry or use low heat setting. Shoes should be thoroughly rinsed after exposure to saltwater. Replacement insoles are available. 7

1 PATENTS& TRADEMARKS / TRADEMARKS

Travelers Bastet traveler car: Licensed under Fogh-Bastet U.S. Patent 4147121: German Patent 2847834; United Kingdom Patent 43028-78. Big boat high beam traveler fastening system: United Kingdom Patent 2153320; Australian Patent 573774

HARKENe is a registered trademark of Harken, Inc. in the following countries: Argentina Japan Australia Korea Benelux Countries New Zealand Braz~l Spain Canada Sweden United Kingdom Chile France United States West Germany Italy

Big Boat Blocks Titanium runner blocks: West German Design Patent MR 26 860; French Design Patent 866781; Canadian Industrial Design Patent 59031; Australia 98081; United Kingdom 1039152; New Zealand 20897; U.S. and other foreign design patents pending Removable top genoa lead car: U S . Patent 4719869; Foreign design patents pending

oo('-J(j ..

Resilient stand up support for blocks: U S . Patent 4718371; Foreign design patents pending

The following trademarks are owned by Harken, Inc. and are registered in the United States and the Benelux Countries and with United States Customs:

Jib Reefing & Furling Systems

HARKEN USA

m /

HEXA-CAT'": Hexa-Cat is a trademark of Harken. Inc HEXARATCHETB: Hexaratchet is a registered trademark of Harken, Inc. BULLET'": Bullet is a trademark of Harken, Inc. in Australia. CAM-MATICD: Cam-Matic is a registered trademark of Harken, Inc

PATENTS Ball Bearing Blocks HARKEN Ball Bearing blocks are covered by one or more of the following patents. U S . 3528645 and 3714838; United Kingdom Patent 1196108; Republic of France Patent 6912035 and Australian Patent 437199.

Furling and reefing systems: Ball bearing system: United Kingdom Patent 2060090; Republic of France Patent 8020616; U.S. and foreign patents pending. Double groove foil system: Licensed under Stearns U S . Patent 3851609 in the U.S. and Harken has right to license Steams foreign patents as follows: Australian Patent 480378; Republic of France Patent 7330280: West German Patent 2342189; United Kingdom Patent 1439283; Italian Patent 1003133; Japanese Patent 1095123 and New Zealand Patent 171744 Main Furling U S . Patent 4679520; Foreign Patents applied for.

Winches & Deck Hardware Harken winches and deck hardware are covered by the following listed and numerous other unlisted patents and trademarks: U.S. 4,261,549; 4,111,397: 4,523,744; and 4,479,453; ltaly 24247; 21367: 21500; 22292; 23962; and 23854.

Shoes Boat shoes: U.S. Trademark 1435719 U S . Design Patent Received

Small Boat Blocks Cam-Matic cam cleat: U S . Patent 4453486; United Kingdom Patent 20035428; West German Patent 2835643.

Other

Micro blocks: U.S. Design Patent 293881; foreign design patents pending.

Harken drive unit. U S, and foreign patents pending.

Magic box: U S . Patent 4074892

Hoyt quick reefing system: Harken is licensed by Garry Hoyt under U.S. Patent 4487147

Swivel base: U S . Patent 4160541; United Kingdom Patent 2012009; West German Patent 28 56 153; other foreign patents pending. U-Adaptor: U S . Patent 3806094

Design Trademark 1442588

Design Trademark 1445750

Q H A R K E N Y A C H T EQUIPMENT D i v i s i o n of Harken, I n c . 1990 All Rights Reserved No portion of thls catalog can be reproduced withoul the expressed wrllten Pr~nledI" U S A permission of Harken, Inc.

3 SMALL BOAT BLOCKS 1

Large ratchet knob is easy to adjust even with cold, wet hands.

Arm is stamoed f m 6061-T6 aluminurn a i d Hardkote Teflon impregnated.

Delrin sideplates and sheave insure lightest passible block.

Cam-Matic cam cleats engage and release easily under all loads.

Ratchet sheaves are machined from solid 6061.T6 al.mlndm for ultlmate strength ano conm on reslslance The n. qe, elght-SIOQ rlameo rlexaratcnel sneave grips sheets tenaciously, but allows line to be eased smoothly.

Special plastic wedges are installed undw cam to adjust angle. 1

underside of arm and me sheet run throuah

'Stainless steel sideplates distribute load.

Rmrsibl8 Cams Cams may be mounted on underside of arm for downward release and the 145 wedge allows cam angle to be tailored to your needs.

spri6s make blocks stand up on eyestraps, padeyes or bases so that they don't hit decks or twist and foul when they are not carrying load.

Ball bearings cany both the line load and prevent sheave from rubbing on the cheeks nf + h block.

Tough Delrin body is UV stabilizedfor years of trouble-free use.

SMALL BOAT BLOCK FEATURES

Stops on bases

D ~ arows l 01 De rm bal bear ngs on a aqe d~ameterrace are me secret to the m l n free-ss ve ing acllon

orevent line f r m foul ng on tse f

T h e best boats deselve the best hardware. The Dragon, as shown on page 9, is a boat of timeless beauty which is raced at the highest levels of competition because it is rewarding and satisfying to sail. Dragon sailors know that Harken hardware offers performance and reliability unmatched by other hardware. For over 20 years Dragon sailors have chosen Harken gear because it is exceptionally free rolling, strong and light, and complements the virtues of the Dragon perfectly. Dozens of unique features make Harken small boat blocks dependably correct for every trimming task on boats from Olympic dinghys to small offshore yachts. Feature for feature Harken small boat blocks are designed to make sailing better. Whether you're racing at the Olympic level, cruising, or daysailing, you'll find that Harken hardware adds to your sailing pleasure. 10

ThrnWy Hwd The three-way shackle system allows swivel blocks to be locked in front or side positions or left to swivel freely. The set screw fits securely into detents on the swivel post, The three.way shackle sys. tem is found on 2.25", 3 . 0 0 , fiddle, little fiddle, Hexaratchet, little Hexaratchet, Hexa-Cat, little HexaCat, and mid-range blocks.

UAdaplor The U-adaptorallows blocks with %" (10 mm) oosts to be attached to swivel basks or to other blocks with W (10 mm) posts.

Wire Blocks To minimize friction from twisting or unlair leads. 1.50" and 2.00" wire blocksfeatureside load balls between the sheave and the sideplate. 1.00" wire blocks use low friction thrust washers for this urpose. All wire blocks open to aHow passing 01 swaged or nicopressed

AdjucPbls Cam Arms The cam arms on all Harken blocks exceDt micro and bullet trioles. adiust to s.it yoJr pan m a r neeos S ~ v ~ nthe g arm up on DOCKS rno~nteon the cockp I or swmg the arm oown when o ocds are mo~ntedon tne caDn h o ~ s e

The becdels on many b ocrs are removab e to alloh attacnment of a spl,ced l ne Removab e becdets are lound on dinghy, 2.25", 3.00", Hexaratchet, little Hexaratchet. liddle. little fiddle, Hexa-Cat and midrange blocks.

..-.-.- - --..-

Tne cam cleals on al Halxen oloc~s(excepl mlcro trlpesl may De revenea for .p or aohn re ease Aol-SI y o ~ Dr ocds 10 tne best con1 gJratlon for yo.r ooat

In-Head Shackle Svrtsm The n nead snaihle system on alngny blocks g ves them a ~ovrprol~le On s nges 11 can be al gneo to ine lront or the s~deor t can be .p-enoed and attached to a post WadQeS Wedges raise cams off ol the deck so that lines can be cleated without scraping your knuckles. The small wedge mounts under the deck to provide a properly angled mounting surface for nuts when the cam is through-bolted.

Manic Bax~s rlai&en mag c ooxes "se a patentea ba I Dearlng system to e lmlnate lr c1 on oetween tne sheaves ana b e l ~ e e ntne sheare ana tne axles Cent meler nmloers on box s oes can be .sed as a relerence gu de lor conslstenl lenslon ng

Eyadnpr Eyestraps provide a convenient mounting base for many small blocks. In addition, the 137 and 201 may be mounted on top of the 150 and 200 Cam-Matic cleats to form a simple fairlead to hold the line at the cleat.

Top QualityAlumirwm Aluminum components such as ratchet sheaves, magic boxes deck organizers and wire block sheaves are made of 6061-T6 alloy which is Hardkote anodized with Teflon imoreonation. This oroduces a vew touoh, smooth finish wh cn s excepllona ly rks~siantto scrarih ng an0 corros on Edges ol a a1.m.n.m components are ro~ndeato Insure gooo aaneslon ol coal~ngsan0 10 minimize wear. 11

7 SMALL BOAT USE CMRT I Hardware suggestions are shown for a number of popular small boat classes. Match your boat to one shown above. The specific configuration of blocks you choose will depend upon your individual needs but this chart will indicate the correct series of blocks to use. Many one design classes have,rules restricting hardware - check your class rules carefully before changing hardware. Some blocks shown below may not actually be used on the class but indicate the size range of blocks which would be appropriate for use on a boat of that size. If you have questions regarding the proper block to use, please contact a hardware consultant at Harken. 12

&&~iJ,$&LJ&$ ?

SNIPE

HOBlE 16

PRINOLE 18-2 FLYING SCOT

r...,;\

!L... #

8 .

L.-

LIGHTNING

FLYING

SOLING

H BOAT

5/24

009

144

2.25

big bullet

2.25

2.25 or fiddle

dinghy

194 8 153

080 8 076

OZ2 OZ3

big bullet

188 8 127

188 & 127

0151016

dinghy

009 & 044

dinghy ,5wire &

009 & 044

011

019 & 043

big bullet

019 & 043

001 & 015,016

Oo9 & 044

001 & 015/016

bullet

2.25"

big bullet

2.25

big bullet

028

118

166

bullet

big bullet

bullet

125 094 085

bullet

dinghy

big bullet

little fiddle

bullet

micro & bullet

bullet

micro & bullet

bullet

micro

bullet

big bullet

242 Cutout

Length

~ - MICRO 1 BLOCKS

B a l l bearing micro blocks meet the need for extremely small, extremely lightweight, free running blocks. They are ideal for a host of applications on sailboards and smaller dinghys and for lightly loaded control lines on boats of all sizes. Small dinghys will use micro blocks for cunninghams, boom vangs, outhauls, traveler controls and barberhaulers. They are perfect for use inside masts and booms where space is restricted. Applications on larger boats include flag halyards, lead car return tackles, and leech cords. The wide range ol variations make micro blocks adaptable to many situations. Compact self-cleating tackles can be made using the micro fiddle with v-jam or the triples with cams. Special Features Common Specilicalions Self-contained sheaves Sheave dia - 718" (22 mm) Stainless sideplates Max line size - '/C(6 mm) Bullet head reduces length Breaking strength - 1200 lbs (544 kg) Compact size Shackle pin dia - '116'' (5 mm) Addilional lnlormalion - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses. 14

Weight

Working

302 Cutout

Side plates can be rotated to allow waged wlre to pass

310 Cutout 31 1

F: W i r e blocks are lightweight, low friction blocks designed to carly wire halyards and control lines. Available in a variety of configurations in three diameters, wire blocks are useful on boats of all sizes. The Hardkote anodized, Teflon impregnated aluminurn sheave is designed for years of service. A hi-load composite bearing allows the sheave to turn freely even under high loads. To minimize friction from twisting or unfair leads, 1 . 5 0 and 2 . 0 0 wire blocks feature side load balls between the sheave and the sideplate. 1 .OO wire blocks use low friction thrust washers for this purpose. The polished stainless steel sideplates are light, strong and offer superb chafe resistance with wire halyards and controls. All sizes and configurations of wire blocks open to allow passing of swaged or Nicopressed wires. All three sizes of wire sheaves are offered separately for use in special installations.

Special FW~UIIII Aluminurn wire sheaves Blocks pass swaged wires Large diameter sheaves Hi-load bearings Stainless sideplates Additional lnfomtinn - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses.

slmw M i ( M Da8rription Olmshr

Maximum Maximum Wirs Working had Size

gth

088 Cutaut 21 mm

44 mm

T h e ball bearing bullet block is used extensively to lead control lines with a minimum of friction. Dinghys and small keel boats use bullet blocks for vangs, outhauls, traveler controls and barberhaulers. Small cruising boats can use bullet blocks to lead furling lines to the cockpit. The wide range of variations make bullet blocks adaptable to almost all control line situations. Wire bullet blocks feature a Teflon impregnated Hardkote anodized aluminum sheave. They also use roller bearings which will carry a higher load than ball bearings but do not roll as freely. Wire bullet blocks are used for halyards and other wire controls on small boats.

Sps&l Famms

Cmmm SpMieslions Bullet head reduces length Sheave dia - 1'1s" (29 mm) Aluminum wire sheaves Max line size - 5/16'' (8 mm) Swivel blocks fit 061 Breaking strength - 2000 lbs (907 kg) Reversible cam cleats Shackle pin dia - '116" (5 mm) Addiliml IafarIwliM - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses.

089 Cutout 21 mm

67 mm

Lanplh

WalpU

104 Wire tnple ~ 1 2 0 0Cam-Matic

3%" 89 mm

7'1. oz 206 g

Maximum Wmrking Lord 750 lbs 340 kg

105 Wire triple w1200 Cam-Matic & becket

3%' 95 mm

7% 02 213 g

750 lbs 340 kg

Use with 102

106 Wire thru-deck

3 76 mm

1'h oz 35 g

500 lbs 227 kg

W10 (5 mm) FH fasteners

107 Wire in-line exit 108 Wire upright lead

3'1" 95 mm 1'12" 38 mm 2'/< 73 mm

2 oz 57 g l'/? oz 42 g 1 % 02 35 g

400 lbs 181 kg 500 lbs 227 kg 500 lbs 227 kg

W10 (5 mm) FH fasteners W10 (5 mm) RH fasteners W10 (5 mm) RH tastenen

113 Pivoting cheek

2%57 mm

1 02 28 g

300 Ibs 136 kg

# l 0 (5 mm) RH fastener

114 Traveler blocks

35K 95 mm 3W 95 mm

1% oz 50g 2 02 579

300 lbs 136 kg 500 lbs 227 kg

Two 082s

~nuipla

109 Wire cheek

115 Wire travelw blocks

Use with 101

One 082 wlone 098

Big

bullet blocks are ideal for main, jib and spinnaker sheets on small dinghys and for control line applications such as cunninghams, vangs, backstays, furling lines and tmveler controls on larger boats. Their large ll/z" (38 mm) sheaves allow the use of W (10 mm) line and make big bullets exceptionally free rolling blocks. Exit and in-line exit blocks are used for turning lines into and out of masts and booms and through decks. Upright lead blocks are perfect for many control line applications, especially under decks and at mast bases. Traveler blocks are specifically designed for small daysailers which use rope or wire bridle travelers. Exit blocks with cams are often mounted on masts for halyards and controls such as downhauls and cunninghams, particularly on small catamarans. They are also used as headknocker blocks on the mainsheets of one designs and small keel boats. Use the 140 with aluminum l50 Cam-Matic cleat for mainsheets, halyards and highly loaded controls. Use the 141 with plastic 200 Cam-Matic cleat for lightly loaded controls.

Olrcrlption 125 Single 126 Single wlbecket 127 Double

WOCM

2M"

1Moz 42 g

64 mm

3M"

128 Double wlbecket

579

3%"

4'k oz 120 g

4%" 114mm

129

Triple

130 Triple wlbecket 131 Thru-deck

133 Traveler block 134 ln-line exit

3%" 95 mm 4%" 121 mm

3M" 89 mm 3%" 89 mm 4%" 121 mm 5

Skkh Maxlmurn Pin ~ o r ~ ~ l p

Olantlr

2 oz

89 mm

132 Cheek

cage diameter sheaves Sheave dia 1%" (38 mm) Max line size - W (10 mm) Bullet head reduces length Swivel blocks fit 061 Breaking strength - 2000 lbs (907 kg) Ad~/Ifiml/ # M m - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses.

LO*~

4% oz 135 g

6Hoz 184 g 6% oz 191 g 2'koz 649 202

579 3% oz 92 g 3% oz

6 mm U"

6 mm W 6 mm W 6 mm

Lold

300 Ibs 136 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg 600 lbs 272 kg 600 lbs Use w1189 272 kg 750 lbs Usew1190 340 kg 750 lbs Use w1191 340 kg

400 lbs 181 kg 300 lbs 136 kg

110 (5 mm) FH

fasteners 110 (5 mm) RH fasteners 300 lbs Two 125s 136 kg 800 lbs 110 15 mm) FH

134 Cutout

046 Cutout

075

075 Cutout

021

Single

022 Single wlbecket

Dinghy blocks are oesigned for tne small ooat sailor who needs a ightweght, ow profile block. The in-head shackle system deeps tne length of the dinghy block very short. Dinghy blocks are also used extensively as control line blocks on larger boats, particularly for traveler controls, and cunninghams on moderately sized offshore boats. These light duty blocks are not meant for use on heavy course racing keel boats or on scows and catamarans.

023 Single wlswivel 024

Single wlswivel

8 becket 025 Double

026 Double wlbecket 027

Cheek

Spchl Mums

C ~ ~ M MSRp s G i t i ~ s Low profile in-head shackle Sheave dia - 13K (44 mm) Max line size - ?h" (10 mm) Shackle upsets Swivel blocks fit 061 Breaking strength - 2000 lbs (907 kg) Removable beckets Shackle pin dia -%E" (5 mm) AdMonrl lnfamnttion - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses. 20

063

Traveier control

075 In-line exit

4" 102mm

1569 6m 1709

2%"

2%.m

350 lbs Two-way in-head 159 kg shackle 350 lbs Two-way in-head 159 kg shackle 350 lbs 159 kg 350 lbs 159kg 700 lbs 318kg 700ibs 318kg 350 lbs Includes fastenen

4m 113 g

159kg 350 lbs U8 (4 mm) RH 159 kg fasteners

76 mm 4"

102 mm 3'h" 89 mm

48" 114mm 3"

76mm

70mm 76 mm 3'V 63 mm 5W 146 mm

85 g

3%02 99 g

3H m 99 g 4 oz 1139 5B m

719

5 8 cu 156 g 7m 198 g

700 lbs Fits big boat 557 318 kg 8 515 travelen

500 lbs U8 (4 mm) RH 227 kg fastenen

047 Cutout 27 mm

1'..

83 mm

186

001 Single 002 Single wlbecket 003 Double

T h i s is the original Harken block and is still the most popular in the Harken line. It is compact, good looking, and exceptionally free running with a high load carrying capacity. 2 . 2 5 blocks are used for main and jib sheets on course racing keel boats, scows and dinghys with large mains. They are often used on mainsheets of daysailing catamarans and for spinnaker halyards and sheets on small offshore boats. You'll find a use for 2 . 2 5 blocks on boats of all sizes.

Special FPrluns Three-way head system Adjustable cam arms Reversible cam cleats

C o m m SpcIII~Iions

Sheave dia - 2lk" (57 mm) Max line size - '116'' (1 2 mm)

AWifiml In/or~~Iim - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses.

ShckIe Pin Dlamr 4'h 4'12 oz 1',611 108mm128g 5mm S 5 02 llt~" 127mm 142g 5mm 4W 81' 2 oz 'h" 114mm 241 g 6 mm 5'k 10 02 'h 138 mm 2848 6 mm

Du~ripiion Lm@ WgM

004 Double wlbecket

3'h 3% oz 83 mm 99 g 047 Thru-deck 3'k 5% oz 89 mm 1569 S 12 oz 048 Triple 127 mm 340 g 076 Triple 5 w 13%02 wlbecket 146 mm 383 g 185 Single w1150 4 10 oz Cam-Matic 102 mm 284 g 186 Single w1150 5 10'h oz cam 8 becket127 mm 2989 206 Upright lead 3%' 5'12 oz 83 mm 156 g

013 Cheek

'h" 6 mm 'h"

6 mm 313611 5 mm 56''

5 mm

Maximum Bra,kinl

Vbt? l "Wrn

500 Ibs 227kg 500 Ibs 227 kg 1WO lbs 454 kg 1000 Ibs 454 kg

2500 lbs 1134kg 2500 lbs 1134 kg 3000 1bs 1361 kg 3000 lbs Use with 078 1361 kg ~exa-cat

500 lbs 227 kg 500 lbs 227 kg 1200 lbs 544 kg 1200 ibs 544 kg 500 ibs 227 kg 500 lbs 227 kg 500 lbs 227 kg

2500 lbs 1134 kg 2500 lbs 1134 kg 3000 lbs 1361 kg 3000 ibs 1361 kg 2500 lbs 1134 kg 2500 lbs 1134 kg 2500 lbs 1134 kg

Includes fastenen and mounting pad U8 (4 mm) RH lastenen Use with 079 Hexa-Cat Use with 080 ~exa-cat Jib sheets or lweakw Use on Prindle 16 f10 (5 mm) RH fasteners 21

3 . 0 0 ball bearing racing blocks are used on scows, catamarans, iceboats and small offshore boats. The large diameter sheaves reduce the friction caused by bending line over a small sheave. For offshore keel boats and applications where the load is substantial, use the stronger cruiser blocks which have heavy-duty shackles and head posts. Examples are mainsheets on boats to 35 ft (10.5 m) and spinnaker sheets on boats to 29 f t (8.8 m). 3.00 wire blocks feature Hardkote anodized, Teflon impregnated sheaves for wire halyards or control lines. The large diameter sheave prevents wire breakdown. They are ideal for situations where a lightweight block is required to carry wire. Hi-load 3 . 0 0 wire blocks use Torlon ball bearings for a higher working load and are used for applications such as halyard lead blocks on masthead boats to 30 ft (9.1 m).

Comnh~nS ~ l i ~ l t i o u s

T ree way head system Sheave dia - 3" (76 mm) Removable beckets Max line size - 7/16'' (12 mm) Aluminum wire sheaves AddiIloonrl l&&/r See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses. 22

S M l r Mlxlmum I,kI, 0~~ripti1101tmgtll WOI~M Pin WO~XIW smC Dllimlnr LoM

005 Racing single 006 Racing single

007

008 011

012 014

049 (169

5 7 or 127mm 1989

5mm

8 or 227 g

5 mm

13'h oz

wlbecket 152 mm Cruising double 5%" 138 mm Cruising double 6%" wlbecket 165 mm Cruising single 5th" 133 mm Cruising single 6'h" wlbecket 159 mm Cheek 4 102mm Cruising triple 6" 152 mm Cruising 5'12" ouadruole 138 mm

383 g

14%.02

411 g

Yls"

Yts" 6 mm Y"

6 mm

8 or

'h"

227 g

6 mm

8% oz 241 g

V 6 mm

6 oz 1709

19%or

'h" 6 mm

553 g

24% or 695 a

6 mm

750 lbs 340kg 750 lbs 340 kg 15W lbs 680 kg 15W Ibs 680 kg 750 lbs 340 kg 750 lbs 340 kg 750 lbs 340 kg 15W Ibs 680 kg 15W lbs

25W lbs 1134kg 2500 lbs

680 ko

1361 ko 8:l

1134 kg

3000 lbs 1361 kg 3W0 lbs Use w1078 or 1361 kg 051 lor 5:l 3000 lbs 1361 kg 3000 lbs 1361 kg

2500 lbs wlfastenen 1134 kg 8 pad

3000 lbs Use w1079 or 1361 kg 052 tor 6:l 3000 lbs Use wlO8l lor

M i d - r a n g e blocks are used extensively for mainsheets, halyards, spinnaker sheets and control lines on medium and large offshore boats. The 3" (76 mm) diameter ball bearing sheave accepts "16" (14 mm) line and has a working load of 1,800 lbs (816 kg). Mid-range blocks can be used on mainsheets on boats with mainsails as large as 500 ft2 (50 m2). They are perfect spinnaker sheet blocks on boats to 36 feet ( l 1 m) and are used as mast base halyard lead blocks on boats to 40 f t (12 m).

SpciaI Fnalures Three-wav head svstem Fiemova~koec~eis AI~mln,m wlre sneaves W ae sheaves

Common Spesiiisstions Sheave dia - 3 176 mm) M M ne size - ~ ~( l 4' mm) 4 M a x wlre s ze - '~1s' (5 rnmj Shackle o n ola - %,6' ,B mm] M M wolic~ngload - 1800 lbs'(816 kg) Breaking strength - 5000 lbs (2268 kg)

1540 1541 1542

1543

Single Single wlbecket Single wlaluminum sheave Single wlaluminum sheave & becket

6V 156mm 7

1302 367g 14 02

184mm

397g

6'K 156 mm

454 g

7'1s'' 184 mm

17 oz 482 a

16 02

For wire halyards or controls

SMALL BOAT SHEAVES M o s t Harken small boat sheaves are not self-contained and cannot be supplied loose. We offer the sheaves which are selfcontained for applications where you need to add a free rolling sheave to your own special configuration. Consider loading carefully and remember that halyard sheaves carry twice the load of the halyard. Self-contained sheaves are sensitive to overtightening. Use lock nuts on the fasteners and avoid applying squeezing loads on the sheaves. The micro, bullet and big bullet self-contained sheaves are Delrin with Delrin ball bearings. They are scored for rope and should not be used for wire. Mid-range sheaves are available in either Delrin or aluminum. Use aluminum sheaves for wire. Self-contained wire sheaves are Hardkote anodized aluminum with Teflon impregnation. They ride on a hi-load composite bearing. The 1'12'' (38 mm) and 2 (51 mm) sheaves have ball bearings to minimize friction between the sheave and the sideplates caused by twisting loads. The 1" (25 mm) wire sheave uses low friction thrust washers for this purpose. The 161 dual sheave universal lead includes two 160 sheaves and is used to divert a line which must turn in either direction. It is often used behind the traveler car on a self-tacking jib or to lead a catamaran traveler control line to a cleat.

I :z

Description

Widlh Weight

Max Line Dia

Max Cenler Max Wire Hole Working Size Diameter Load

LlT7lE HEXARATCHET" I he little Hexaratchet is a smaller version of the Hexaratchet II + 2. is ideal for small boat main, jib, and spinnaker sheets. It allows the crew to hand hold sheets with up to 10 to 1 holding power. The special reverse ratchet, 043, rotates in the opposite direction from the standard little Hexaratchet. It is paired with the 019 for applications like spinnaker and jib sheets where ratchet rotation must be in opposite directions and it is desirable to have the onloff switch on both blocks face up. Harken little Hexaratchets feature an eight-sided sheave which is machined from solid aluminum for the ultimate in strength and corrosion resistance. Hexaratchets nm on Delrin ball bearings so friction is virtually nonexistent when trimming under either high or low loads. The onloff switch will operate under load.

S$&/ F#wra Cami?k~Sprcifiwliolls Solid aluminum sheave Sheave dia - 2'k" (57 mm) Three-way head system Max line size - W (10 mm) Switch operates under load Max working load - 500 lbs (227 kg) Reversible cam cleats Breaking strength - 2000 lbs (907 kg) Fits 061 stanchion base Holding power w/180° wrap - 10:l Add~lonl1-ion - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses. 26

017

Cheek (stbd)

3%" 95 mm 3%" 95 mm 4

4 5 m Turns clockwise. Supplied 128 g wlfastenm & pad

018

Cheek (port)

020 Single wlbecket

5" 127mm

5%m

043 Single wlreverse

rotati~

4'6" 108 mm

187 Single w1150 Cam-Matic

4'6" 108 mm

019

Single

108mm

4 8 oz

128 g 5 oz 1429

Turns counterclockwise. Supplied wlfaslem (l pad

1569 5 or Tums in oppasite 142 g direction (mm 019 10% or Use for leeward 298 g cleating jib sheets

9Et, Y'

009

01 5

. @ @ 044

HEXARATCHETBII+ 2 R a t c h e t blocks are truly hand and crew savers W ~ t hthe~run~quely shaped sheave they grip loaded sheets w ~ t hup t o 15 to 1 hold~ng power yet allow a l ~ n eto be eased Instantly w ~ t hcomplete control They perm~tthe crew to hand hold maln, 11band sp~nnakersheets w ~ t honly a fract~onof the effort that a regular block requlres The spec~alreverse ratchets 044 and 045, rotate in the opposlte d~rect~on from the standard Hexaratchet 11+2 They are palred wlth the 009 and 050 for appl~cat~ons l ~ k esp~nnakerand j ~ bsheets where ratchet rotatlon must be in opposlte d~rect~ons and it IS des~rableto have the onloff s w ~ t c hon both blocks face up Harken Hexaratchets feature an e~ght-s~ded sheave w h ~ c hIS mach~nedfrom sol~dalumtnum for the ultlmate in strength and corrosion res~stance Hexaratchets run on Delr~nball bear~ngsso f r ~ c t ~ oISn v~rtuallynon-exlstent when trlmmlng under e~therhlgh or low loads An onloff button allows the ratchet mechan~smto be turned off in l~ghtalr

Special fealums Common Spec111caI1ons Sheave d ~ a- 3 ' (76 mm) Solld alum~numsheave Three-way head system Max lhne slze - 7/16" (1 2 mm) Max work~ngload - 750 lbs (341 kg) Removable beckets Break~ngstrength - 2000 lbs (907 kg) Adjustable cam arms Hold~ngpower ~ 1 1 8 0 "wrap - 15 1 Revers~blecam cleats Hold~ngpower w1120° wrap - 9 1 Fits 144 sw~velbase Add1110nallnhrmalion - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of spec~alfeatures See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses

01cription

009 Single 015 Cheek (stbd) 016 Cheek (port) Single wireverse rotation 045 S~nglewibecket a reverse rotation 050 S~nglewibecket 044

Length

WeijM

8% 02 241 g

127 mm 4 102 mm 4

102 mm 5 127 mm

6 152 mm 6 152 mm

090 Single wi150 5 Cam-Mat~c 127 mm 091 Single wi150 6" Cam-Matlc & becket 152 mm

7'12 oz Tums clockw~se.Supplied 213 g wifastenen & pad 7% oz Turns counterclockwise. Supplied 21 3 g wilasteners pad 8'k oz Turns in opposite 241 g direction from 009 9 oz Tumsin opposite 255 g direct~onlrorn 050 9 02 Used for 2:l jib sheets 255 g on catamarans 13'12 oz Cam on adjustable am 343 g 14'12 oz Use for 2.1 self-cleating lib sheets 411 Q

L i t t l e fiddle blocks are ideal for mainsheets and vangs on dinghys and cruising boats to 24 feet (7.3 m) or wherever a small three or four part tackle is required. Little fiddle blocks are available in a variety of configurations. These include fiddles with little Hexaratchets and with Cam-Matic cam cleats on adjustable arms. Little fiddle blocks accept the 111 snap shackle which makes them easy to remove lor storage.

Spscrfl FsnPm cl7mmM SprcIIIuUm Three-way head system Large sheave dia - 2 V (57mm) Solid aluminum sheave Small sheave dia - 1h'' (38 mm) Switch operates under load Shackle pin dia - 3/16" (5mm) Removable beckets Max line size - W (10 mm) Max working load - 500 lbs (227 kg) Adjustable cam arms Reversible cam cleats Breaking strength - 2000 lbs (907 kg) AWUlonrl l~~ - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses. 28

053 Fiddle 054 Fiddle wlbeckel

152mm 6%" 171 mm

055 Fiddle wlHexaratchet

6" 152 mm

056 Fiddle wIHexaratchet 8 bedre1 057 Fiddle w l 1 M Cam-Matic

6 171 mm

058 Fiddle w1150 Cam-Matic 8 becket

059 Fiddle wlHexaratchet 8 150 Cam-Matic

060 Fiddle wlHexarafche1.

6" 152 mm 6%"

6'h Oz Use W1002 184g

7 oz

for3:l

Use w1053

198g

for 4:1

7 az

Use w1002

198 g for 3:1 7'12 oz Use w1053 2139 for4:l 1202 Use w1002 340 g for 3:l

171 mm

12%02 Use w1053 3549 lor4:i

6" 152 mm 6%"

340 g 13 02

1202

UsewlOO2

for 3.1

Usewl053

FIDDLE

BLOCK^ Length

Fiddle blocks are used to build simple three and four part purchases for mainsheets, vangs and other applications. The large sheave/small sheave confiauration orevents line chafe and forms a -~~ very neat low friction tackk. Harken fiddle blocks are available in a variety of configurations. These include fiddles with Hexaratchets and Cam-Matic cam cleats on adjustable arms. Fiddle blocks accept the 112 snap shackle which makes them easy to remove for storage. ~~

Wsighl

Cllmmnn Sp~iWiono Large sheave dia - 3 (76 mm) Small sheave dia - 1 % (44 mm) Shackle pin dia - 'h'' (6 mm) Max line size - V (10 mm) Max working load - 750 lbs (340 kg) Breaking strength - 2000 lbs (907 kg) llddilo~lInIw~~tIim - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses.

Special Features Three-way head system Solid aluminum sheave Removable beckets Adjustable cam arms Reversible cam cleats

& becket

241 mm

036

Fiddle w1150 Cam-Matz

038

Fiddle ~ 1 1 5 0Cam-Matic 8 becket Fiddle wlHexaralchet B 150 Cam-Matic

8 241 mm

Fiddle wlHexaratchet. 150 Cam-Matic & becket

040 042

184 mm

367 g

far 4:l

16%. 02 Use w1006 468 g far 3:1

184 mm

16% oz 468 g 17% oz 496 g

Use w1028 for 4:1 Use ~ 1 0 0 6 far 3:l

8'1%" 241 mm

18 az 510 o

Use wlO28 foi 4:l

LITTLE HEXA-CATS

L i t t l e Hexa-Cats combine a little Hexaratchet with big bullet blocks to make powerful, multi-purchase systems for mainsheets on small catamarans and keel boats. They also make ideal vangs on boats to 25 feet (7.6 m) and are useful for tackles such as split backstay adjusters on boats to 28 feet (8 m). For best results, little Hexa-Cats should be matched with the blocks shown.

S p ~ ~ iFsrlunrr al Co~nmonS ~ I I c r t l ~ ~ s Three-way head system Lower sheave dia - 2%" (57 mm) Solid aluminum sheave Upper sheave dia - l'h" (38 mm) Switch operates under load Max line size - #" (10 mm) Adjustable cam arms Shackle pin dia - l/," (6 mm) Reversible cam cleats Breaking strength - 2500 lbs (1134 kg) AddItlmwl lnim'mah - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses. 30

otsripll~ 189 Five-part Hexa-Cat 190 Six-part Hexa-Cat 191 Seven-part Hexa-Cat 192 Eight-part Hexa-Cat 193 Hexa-Cal base

Llnglh 8 206 mm

9%" 232 mm 8W 219 mm

9% 238 mm 5 V 146 mm

Maximum Working LDld 16 m 900 lb 454 g 408 kg 16B oz 900 1 b 468 g 408 kg 18 oz l000 lbs 510 g 454 kg 18 oz 1200 lbs 510 g 544 kg 12 oz 5CU Ibs 340 g 227 kg W8igM

Use w1128 Use w1129 Use wl130 Use wltwo 127s or one 129 (L one 125 For building special configurations

Hexa-cats were designed to provide powerful mainsheet tackles for catamarans which, because of their trampoline decks, are limited to a single attachment point. They soon became just as popular on offshore boats where they allow large mainsails to be sheeted without a winch. Today they are used for mainsheets, vangs, backstay adjusters and other tackles on a wide range of boats. A Hexa-Cat consists of a Hexaratchet block with 150 Cam-Matic and 2.25" blocks mounted on top of it with a swivel. The 112 heavy duty snap shackle can be used for fast, easy removal of your Hexa-Cat. For best results, Hexa-Cats should be matched with the proper blocks on the boom. See the chart for the correct combination. ~r~~

Lower sheave dfa - 3 (76 mm) Upper sneave d a - 2'14" (57 mm) M'ai line size - 7/16" (12 mm) Max working load - 1500 lbs (680 kg) Shackle pin dia - %" (6 mm) Breaking strength - 3000 lbs (1361 kg) AddIIinnal Inlnfn~ation- See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special leatures. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses. ~'nree-waynead system Sol~oa l ~ mn ~ m sheave Adjustable cam arms Reversible cam cleats Removable beckets

081

069

Four 001s

3 LOW PROFILE TRIPLES

L o w profile triple ratchet systems are useful on catamarans which carry their booms very close to the deck and for powerlul mainsheet and vang systems on offshore boats. All blocks with cams feature a becket eyestmp over the cleat to allow very close sheeting. All cams can be reversed for up or down release and all cam arms are adjustable to suit your precise needs. Small catamarans can use the light duty models which feature a single swivel post but larger catamarans and offshore boats M use the heavy duty models which have a coupler joining the three posts for greater strength.

Spssirl fe8ms Allows close sheeting Becket eyestraps on cam arms Adjustable cam arms Reversible cam cleats A M W lnlwnrlfna - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses.

Omrlplln 051 Triple wlHexaratchet & cam 052 Triple wlHexaratche1. becket 8 cam 152 Light duty triple wlHexaratchet. m m &swivel post 153 Light duty triple wlswivel post 194 Light duty triple wlHexaratchet, cam & swivel pod 195 Triple wlHexara1ckt & cam 196 Triple wIHexaratchet. cam & becket

shun laptl WICY 01: 3' 76 mm 3" 76 mm 3" 76 mm 2'K 57 mm 2'k" 57 mm 2%" 57 mm 2%" 57 mm

138 mm 6%" 171 mm 5%" 133 mm 4%" 114 mm 4'K 114 mm 48" 114 mm 6'h" 159 m

27 OZ 765 g 29 oz 822 g 25 02 709 g 10 a2 264 g l 6 oz 510 g 20 02 567 g 21 02 5958

Mr Mu Lm. I ~ W~ Om ~r Iornth ~ --- S W h 'Its" 1500 Ibs 12 mm 680 kg 'It< 1500 Ibs 12 mm 680 kg l " 750 lbs 12 mm 340 kg %C 750 lbs 12 mm 340 kg X" 500 Ibs l0 mm 227 kg W 1000 lbs l0 mm 454 kg W 1000 lbs l0 mm 454 kg

MOO lbs 1361 kg 3000 lbs 1361 kg 2000 lbs 907 kg 2000 lbs 907 kg 2000 lbs 907 kg

3000 lbs 1361 kg 3000 lbs 1361 kg

Use wlOOB for 51: w1049 for 6:l Use w1049 for 6:1 Use wIW4 for 5:i; w1153 for 6:l Use w1153 for 6:l Use w1004 for 5:l; w1048 for 6:l Use wIW4 for 53; w1048 for 6:l Use w1048 for 6:l

Part ~ m r i i g ~ * h . TRnl NI. Mamial m,

~hwo Lg: Diomnt~r

HOI~ spring

M a g i c boxes are powerful, multipart tackles housed in a compact aluminum extrusion. The box eliminates twists and keeps the line perfectly organized. The secret to the Harken magic box is a patented ball bearing system to Drevent friction between the sheaves and between the sheaves and the axles. Magic boxes are useful for outhauls, downhauls, cunninghams, jib halyards, backstays and many other controls which require a powerful tackle with a limited range of adjustment. They are used on boats from small dinghys to large offshore racers. Hi-load versions which use Torlon balls are available to increase the working load capability.

S p i a l FFssdrrss Common SpIIIc8fIm Ball bearing sheaves Line size - 5/32" (4 mm) Low stretch line Fasteners - $10 (5 mm) Removable beckets Numeric tensioning guide AWitional lnlon111lion - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses.

135

'il"(6 mm) diameter stainlw steel S haok for 6 parl magic box. Allows quick dismnnect of halyards.

136

5s'' (6 mm) diameter stainless steel S hook for 8 oan manic box.

E;": Load

~wakiy

DECK ORGANIZERS D e c k organizers are used when a large number of lines need to be led in a small space. They are often used to run halyards and control lines aft from the mast to winches near the cockpit. Deck organizers are also ideal for many other applications which require multiple sheave cheek blocks. Small boat deck organizers feature 1%" (38 mm) ball bearing sheaves. They are intended for use on rope halyards on boats under 26 feet 18 m) or for liahtlv loaded control lines on laraer boats. Small boat deck orgaizirs are available in double oririple sheave configurations. Stacked double and triple organizers are used when i t is necessary to lead a large number of lines aft in a small area.

Conrnon SpecifiiMtionr Sheave dia 1%" (38 mm) Fasteners - # l 0 (5 mm) FH Max line size - W (10 mm) Max workina load (Der sheave) 300 ibs (i36 kg) Breaking Strength - 2000 lbs (907 kg) AWINmI lnlormtio11- See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses. 34

Spstirl Fwtum Self-contained sheaves Compact length Low profile construction

270 Double sheave 271 Triple sheave 272 Stacked double sheave 273 Stacked triple sheave

S'As" 129 mm 6'%d' 173mm 5'h~" 129 mm 6'%d' 173 mm

%" 22 mm

4'h or 128 g

108 mm x 22 mm

6% oz 1849

152mmx22mm

22mm lslta"

40 mm 1Yd 40 mm

7'h oz 191 g 12% 02 355 g

,~7

4 ? * ,v 108 mm x 22 mm 7 ,

152 mm x 22 mm

MID-RANGE DECK ORGANIZERS

Running halyards and control lines aft allows the crew to operate the boat from the security of the cockpit. Deck organizers are used to lead multiple lines from the mast. They are useful for halyards, reef lines, outhauls, pole lifts and other control lines. Deck organizers are also ideal for many other applications which require multiple sheave cheek blocks. Harken mid-range deck organizers feature 2" (51 mm) ball bearing sheaves. Sheaves are available in plastic for rope halyards or controls and in Hardkote anodized aluminum for wire halyards. They are intended for use on halyards on boats to 37 feet (11.5 m) or for lightly loaded control lines on larger boats. Mid-range deck organizers are offered in double or triple sheave configurations. Stacked double and triple organizers are available when it is necessary to lead a large number of lines aft in a small area. Special Fealures Self-contained sheaves Large diameter sheaves Compact length Low profile construction Aluminum wire sheaves

Common Specific8Iions Sheave dia - 2" (51 mm) Fasteners - 'h" (6 mm) Max line size - YE" (16 mm) Max wire size (alum sheave) - '132" (5 mm) Max working load (per sheave) -500 lbs (227 Breaking strength - 2500 lbs (1134 kg) Additional lnlomation - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses.

1500 Double sheave

6%"

1501 Triple sheave

175 mm 9%s' 233 mm

1 29 mm 1 29 mm

9b az 5"11r" x 1 % " 269 g 148 mm x 30 mm 1 3 % ~ 8l/a"x13/t< 383 g 207 mm x 30 mm

6% 175 mm

2 54 mm

16'12 W

468 g

148 mm X 30 mm

9Ym"

2 54 mm

23'12 oz

8%' X 1Yla" 207 mm x30 mm

1502

Stacked double

sheave

1503 Stacked triple

sheave

1504 Double aluminum sheave

1505

Triplealuminum sheave

Stacked double aluminum sheava 1507 Stacked triple 1506

aluminum sheave

233 mm 64" 175mm

9%d'

233 mm 6'iI175 mm W< 233 mm

I'/a"

29mm

666 g 12 oz 3419

5'Yt6" X 131,d.

5'3/h" X 121,i'

148mmx30mm

29 mm

1W"

1702 482 g

8'K X l31t< 207 mmx 30 mm

2'/a" 54 mm

22 oz 624 g

5'11~< X 1 Y d 148 mm x 30 mm

2 54 mm

880 g

31 oz

8W X 1%"

207 mm x 30 mm

Harken bases provide a variety of mounting possibilities for blocks and cam cleats. The patented 144 and 205 swivel bases ride on two rows of ball bearings to insure smooth, easy pivoting under load. The 144 is ideal for mainsheets on larger boats and for installations on small boats where the base is mounted on the cockpit sole. The 205 is perfect for dinghys and small offshore boats where the base is mounted at deck level. The 010 and 029 are designed for installations where a pivoting stand up block is required. It is often used on mainsheets of small dinghys when the cleats are mounted on the side decks. The 240 and 241 swivel bases with cams are useful for boardboat mainsheets and control lines on boats of all sizes. The 238 and 239 are used when your pull is not always directly in line with the cleat. The 061 stanchion mount base permits easy attachment of a variety of blocks to '1s" or 1" (22 mm or 25 mm) stanchions or pulpits. It is frequenty used for furling lines where its swiveling mounting socket insures proper leads. 36

A special spring made of the finest spnng material in the wotld.

Completely non-corrasre.

Smooth "V" entry keeps line in whm cam is upside down.

Rounded teeth wtll not cut or tear line - they hold by s q w i n g line. not cutting into it.

Oraln hole allows trapped water 10 escape.

Hardkote Teflon cmpregnated die cast aluminum b s e has fairing

far smooth entry of tine and is raised UP SO you can pull the lhne in wcthout scraping knuckles.

Three row 01 Delrins ball bearinw d~stributehlgh loads evenly and allow cam to rotate moolhly and easily

T h e Cam-Matic ball bearing cam cleat is the most significant product design since the ball bearing block. These cams open so freely, grip so securely and release so easily that they could be considered almost fully automatic. Ball bearings allow the cams to open smoothly under even the highest loads so lines can be engaged or released without the need to draw the line through the cleat. The lack of friction in these cleats also means that the springs can be lighter so the cleats open even more freely and the teeth do not have to be sharp so your line lasts longer. The aluminum 150 Gam-Matic cleat is used in high load and continuous adjustment applications where its superior strength and wear resistance are necessary. The plastic 200 low profile Cam-Matic cleat is used for lightly loaded and infrequently adjusted control lines. The 137 eyestrap fits the 150 Cam-Matic forming a fairlead to contain the line at the cleat. The 201 eyestrap serves as a fairlead for the 200 low profile Cam-Matic cleat. The 145 wedge kit allows cleats to be raised and angled for better leads in special situations. Each kit includes a wedge and an under-deck shim to provide a properly angled mounting surface for nuts when the cam is through bolted.

Special Fralures Common SpsciIcaIions Delrin balls for smooth operation Hole spacing - ll/z" (38 mm) Rounded teeth protect line Width - 1'/1" (32 mm) Drain holes in base 0 (5 mm) FH Fasteners - #l Addiiional IniorMlon - See pages 10 and 11 for an explanation of special features. See pages 12 and 13 for suggested uses.

Super rtrmg cams made of Hardkote Teflon lmptegnateddie cast eluminum

M1xi11~mM i l i m m M ~ i m u m Lino Una Working Omkiq Silo Sin Loll

Dnsripliol

HnigM

WoigN

150 Cam-Matic

1%" 28 m m

2H 02

l '

71 g 1%.02 43 g

12mm

200 Low profile

Cam-Mallc 25 m m

Yli' 8 mm

l" 3 mm h 3 mm

300 lbs 136 kg 150 ibs 68 kg

M#arial

750 ib Aluminum 340 kg 500 ib Plastic 227 kg Use W1150

SMALL BOAT ACCESSORIES ,

)mall boat accessories complement the small boat block line. The 062 hand hold is popular on boats like Solings to help hiking crew reenter the boat. It has a drain port. Springs support blocks on bases, eyestraps, padeyes, and traveler cars. The 077 is used to attach a Hexaratchet t o the steering post of DN iceboats. Blocks are attached to 144 and 205 bases with a 093 U-adapter. It is also used to join two swivel blocks or to attach a block to a tang. Snap shackles are used to make blocks removable. Eyestmps are light duty mounting bases for blocks. The 137 and 201 form fairleads when mounted on the 150 or 200 Cam-Matic cleats. The 237 bullseye is used as a fairlead when there is little deflection. I

2 Orsrrpaon 062 Hand hold

SkkI8 A

011

5%" 3'K 146 mm 89 mm

071 Stand up 2" 'h" spring 51 mm 22 mn 097 Small stand 1" V up spring 25 mm 19 mm 072 Small M" %B" shackle 12 mm 11 mm 136 Large "hs" 8" shackle 17 mm 16mm 077 DN adenter

I'h

"h<

MIX Worllq Lold

093 U-adapter

#l0 FH Cutout 4%e" x l'h" 5 m m 113mmx48mm

111 Snap

Fits bullet blocks 31,s''

Inside dimensions

A and B Inside dimensions A and B

Attaches 009 to

6 mm

SWl, ~n 011

Manor

Fits all small blocks

5 mm

'h" %s" 12mm 11mr

29/!s' shackle 65 mm 112 Large snap 3W shackle 86 mm 073 Eyestrap l"h6" 43 mm 137 Large

eyestrap 201Lowpofile eyestmp 237 Bullseye fairlead

Loll

Inside dimensions

5 m

A and B

% 1000 i Ih 454 kg %" 1500 lbs 6 mm 680 kg

Fits blocks with Y I ~ "(5 mm) shackle Fits blocks with 'W (6 mm) shackle

5 mm

'h"

12 mm

2" W 51 mm 19 mm 1%" W 48 mm 10 mm 1%"

M1X

Worltinp briar

I'k"

38 mm 32 mm

#l0 RH 5 mm U10 RH 5 mm U10 RH 5 mm X10 RH 5 mm

Hole spacing 1'h" (32 mm) Hole spacing 1'12" (38 mm) Fits 150 Hole spacing l'h" (38 mm) Fits 200 Hole spacing 1" (25 m)

BIG BOAT BLOCKS 1

Stainless mylock nuts prevent vibration from loosening fasteners.

Shackles are high strength 17-4PH Stainless steel, polished to a high

Hanging blocks leature a 17-4PH stainless steel swivel wst which is isolated from the head by a creep resistant plastic liner,

Sheaves and sideplates are machined M stamped from solid 6061-T6 aluminum for lightweight strength. All aluminwn pans are Hardkote anodized with Teflon impregnation for the ultimate in cormsian W t a n c e .

Set screws may be tightened to secure the shackle in either a front or side pasition M may be left loose to allow the block to swivel.

Delnn balls cany ede oaos ceeplng sneaver lrom ~ b b ~ n g against the side plates.

Super high strength Torlon roller bearinas c a m the hiah radial loads in hanging blocks and foot blocks.

Sheaves are designed for easy maintenance. A freshwater rinse and occasional squirt with a light spray lubiiant is all that is required.

Stainless bolts have low orofile heads and are wlished and passivated to increase corrosim resistance.

1he best sailing requires a combination of good crew, a good boat, good sails and great hardware. Cruising or racing, when these elements come together sailing will be fun. When the G p l e who design, build and commission a new boat are sailors, the overwhelming choice for hardware is Harken. The J135 pictured on page 39 uses Harken hardware because the crew sought lightweight hardware of total reliability. From the small boat blocks used for controls, to the big boat lead can and Harken winches which handle the highly loaded genoa system, the Harken deck gear offers the crew a higher level of sail control. whatever yodr level of competition. from the Adm ra 's CL^ to fan y cruis ng. HarXen hardware olfers offshore sailors total perlormance with complete reliab~l~ty lrom a manufacturer w.th the aoility to meet all your nardware needs and wlth thecommitment to be a part of yoJr W nning team. 40

Foot blocks have large swallows to pass sheets and twists freely.

The foot blocks soeciallv ~, , shaoed ~, housino accommoaates a wide range ol teaa anies Bolt spacing s oes gneo to proper y spread loads to the deck structure ~

Titanium blocks~ use 6-4AL titanium -~ .. ~ for . the .- . oesl poss~oleslrengln lo rve gnl rat OS Tne S~rlaceof litan 4m bloc6 IS cnemdca y treated after machinino and vauor honed to an attractive corrosiofresistant finish. Bails on runner blocks keen lines on sheaves and tne ba Is on srano 2; an0 nang ng o ocks are specla ly deslgneo to allorv blocks to articw ate c ose lo oecks R~nneroloc6s are ollered with a variety of head posts and tangs for attachment of runners and checkstays. ~

Wire and rope rigging is protected by a combination groove which supports both materials extremelv well.

~~~

An attractive hanging tab is standard on all spreacher blocks and can be litted to any big boat block Spreachers are designed to pass shackles (except 596 and 597) to facilitate running new sheets

~~~

Stand-up blocks can pivot in all direct~ons and sw~velfreelv. or be locked in front or sloe postt ons i n qJe, attract ve stano.Jp oev ce a lows 390~6sto l01ow even gnt loads freely

Kevlar and Spectra line is protected by large diameter sheaves wiih special grooves which allow the line to flatten to avoid stress concentration.

computer-designed halyard and runner sheaves leature lightening holes and special composite bearings to carry the enormous loads.

Br~~kli7J Strung~h The load at which fastenina bolts will shear, shackles will break or c a n WI come of1 ol t r a c k AI [his oaa tnere may oe permanent deformation ol tne sneave, sdebates and oearinas Breadna strengths are based on the use of type 304 stainiess fasten& loaded in double shear.

Sale Worklq L& A rating based on 50% of the breaking strength of the hardware. Safe working load provides a margin of safety and should never be exceeded

Teardrop fairlead blocks are excellent mast base halyard leads as they hold lines extremely close to the deck and have limited articulation on their padeye.

2% FrlcNon Loss Load This rating, which is a Harken exclusive, defines the performance of the hardware. It is the load at which a sheave or car will still roll freely. On double blocks 2% friction loss load is per sheave. When the load is increased beyond this point the sheave will still roll but friction loss will exceed 2% of the load. Although 2% friction loss load will occasionally exceed safe working load, no hardware should ever be subjected to loads higher than the safe wolking load.

Mainsheet Traveler Car

1508

1509

4 BIG BOAT BLOCK RECOMMENDATIONS I Hardware specifications are for masthead boats of modern configuration. Fractionally rigged boats or boats with heavy or light displacement may require different hardware. Boats at the upper end of each size range should use the larger of the blocks shown. Please contact a hardware consultant at Harken if you have questions regarding the suitability of any hardware for your boat. Hardware is specified by part number where possible. Your needs may require a similar block of a different configuration.

* For masthead boats under 30 feet (9.1 m) ** Choose from blocks shown on .paqes - 1 4 throuqh 36. *** Running backstay blocks must be matched to the breaking strength of the runner wire.

**** Assumes that runner purchase is 2:1 with runner tail deadended on a separate padeye rather than on a becket block.

***** See system diagrams on pages 176 and 177 for suggested multiple purchase systems.

46-50' (14-15.25 m]

51-55' (15.5-16.7 m]

56-60' (17.18.3 m)

6 1-65' 118.6-19.8 m)

66-70' 120-21.4 m)

Maxi

516 560 680

516 560 680 1701 1706

1701 1706

660 661 1701 1706

660 661

558 21515s

21515s 1700 21558s 1704 1705 1708

1700 1704 1705 1708

665 678 679 751 1704 Custom 1700 1705

665 678 679 751 Custom

Big Boat 3 . 0 0 4.00 586

4.00 4.50 586

4.50

4.50" 5 . 5 0 1708

5 . 5 0 681 751 1708

5.50 7.00" 681 751

509 513

509 510 513 514

510 514 535 536

535 536

601

531 532

531 532 533 534

533 534 537 538

537 538

602

554 587

554

Custom

516 680

516 680 1701 1706

1701 1706

660 661 1701 1706

660 661

511 653

508 512

509 513

539 541 549 647 672 673 674 675 1712 1713

539 541 674

543 s45 676 677 1716 1717

543 545 604 676 677 684 1716 1717

Custom

539 541 543 545 674 1714 675 676 675 I7l4 1715 677 1715

724 725 726

511 653

508 511 512 653

508 512

508 509 512 513

539 541 588 649

539 541

539 541 543 545

543 545

543 545 604 684

604 684

696 697 698 699

698 699 700 701

700 701

700 701 1726 1727

1726 1727

1714 1715

1716 1717

1726 1727

556 583

593 594 596 597

Custom

672 673 1720 1721 1722 1723

672 673 674 675 1722 1723

674 675 676 677 1722 1723

676 677 1724 1725

Custom

508 511 512 653

508 512

508 509 512 513

509 513

509 510 513 514

692 693 718 719

692 693 694 718 719 720

693 694 719 720

693 694 695 719 720 721

694 695 720 721

695 721

2.25" HI-L OAD BIG BOAT BLOCKS L.25" hi-load blocks are designed for applications where the need for a small, light big boat block outweighs the need for low friction at low loads. Hi-load blocks use a special bearing system which combines side load carrying balls with a Teflon composite bushing to carry the radial loads. While not as free rolling as the standard Harken balllroller bearing system, this hi-load bearing system is extremely durable and well suited to applications where a small diameter block must carry high loads. 2.25 hi-load blocks are well suited to applications like spinnaker tweaker blocks and genoa barberhauls where size and weight are the primary considerations. They should not be used for applications like mainsheets. The sideplate on the 1754 and 1755 opens to accept lines and they are perfect for tweakers or barberhaulers.

8 Ihima T ree way head system Hi-load bearing system Removable beckets

Cemm Sp8cifications Sheave dia - 2%" (57 mm) Shackle pin dia - 5/16'' (8 mm) Max line size - l12" (12 mm) Max wire size - %E" (8 mm) ArWnhl lal~li~ufion - See pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of special features. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses. 44

1746 Single

1747

Single

1748 Single wlbecket 1749 Single wlbecket 1750 Double

1751 Double 1752 Fairlead 1753 Fairlead

1754 Fairlead wlopening sideplate 1755 Fairlead wlopenina

Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar

5'1ts'

138 mm 5'1ta" 138 mm 6@1xa" 169 mm 6%sU 169 mm 5'lts" 138 mm 5'1te" 138 mm 3'k 89 mm 3'h 89 mm 3'k 89 mm 3'k

13 oz 369 g 13 oz 369 g 15 oz 425 g 15 m 425 g 31 oz 879 g 31 oz 879 g 9 oz 255 g 9 or 255 g 9 oz 255 g 9 az

3000 Ibs 1381 kg 3000 Ibs 1361 kg 3000 Ibs 1361 kg 3000 Ibs 1361 kg 3000 Ibs 1361 kg 3000 Ibs 1361 kg 2500 lbs 1134 kg 2500 lbs 1134 kg 2500 lbs 1134 kg 2500 lbs

WOO lbs 2722 kg WOO lbs 2722 kg WOO lbs 2722 kg WOO lbs 2722 kg 6000 Ibs 2722 kg 6000 Ibs 2722 kg MOO Ibs 2768 kg 5000 lbs 2768 kg 5000 lbs 2768 kg 5000 lbs

1 3.00" BIG BOAT BLOCKS ~

3.00"

big boat blocks are ex:remey popular on smaller oifshore boats where they are used on rnansheets. runniny backstays. halyards, and spnnaker sheets and guys They are also used extensively on larger boats for such applications as reeiiny blocks and traveler control b l o c ~ s

Special Features

Common Specilicalions Sheave rlia - 3" (76 mm) Shackle pin d ~ a- 5hi" ( 8 mm) 20; frlcton load - 3000 15s 11361 k g ) Max n e sire - '12" ( 1 2 mm) Max w r e slze - k/16'' (8 mm) Addilional lnlormalion - See oaoes 40 and 41 for an exolanat~ono i Three-way head system R o l e r ~ b a lbealng syslelll Removable beckets Stand-ups s w v e alid p v o t

590. 651

Owrlflbn 549 Fairlead

ten@

Wire Rope

588 Single

4.00" BIG BOAT BLOCKS

589 Single wlbecket 590 Double

4 - 0 0 big boat blocks are used when an exceptionally free rolling block is required for moderate loads on offshore boats. 4 . 0 0 big boat blocks have many applications on mainsheets, running backStays, spinnaker sheets, afterguys, halyard leads and reefing blocks.

S MIh#l~~es

Cmnh~psrifi~ti0~8 Sheave dia - 4 (102 mm) Shackle pin dia - 5/76'' (8 mm) Max line size - '12" (12 mm) Max wire size - 51is" (8 mm) 2% friction load - 3600 lbs (1633 kg) Safe wolking load - 4950 lbs (2245 kg) Breaking strength - 99MI lbs (4491 kg) Addnionrl flnimtim - See pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of Special features. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses. See pages 60 through 63 for blocks with stainless steel sideplates. 46

TEe-way head system Rollerlball bearing system Removable beckets Stand-ups swivel and pivot 17-4 PH stainless shackles

591 Double wlbecket 647 Fairtead 649

Single

650 Single wlbecket 651 Double 652

Double wlbecket

672 Stand up 673 Stand up

Wire Rope Wire Rope Wire

5%" 146 mm 7%" 191 mm

WpN

20 az 567 g 24 az 680 g 26 oz 737 g

Fits 689 & 690 padeyes

38 m

1.08 kg

%C (B mm)

Rope

8%' 222 mm 7'K 184 mm

Wire

8%'

40 oz

%<(B mm)

184 mm

38 oz 1.08 kg

%c' (8 mm)

8%' 222 mm

4001 1.13 kg

%E (8 mm) twist shackle

33 oz 936 g 32'h oz 921 g

Use lour

~ope Kevlar Spectra Kwlar Spectra Kevlar Spectra Kevlar Spectra Kwlar Spectra Wire Rope Kwlar Spectra

222 mm 5%' 146 mm 71k 191 mm 8%' 222 mm

7%'

178 mm 7'

178 mm

1.13 kg 20 oz 567 g 24 oz 680 g 26n oz 751 g

twist shackle

twist shackle Fits 689 6 690 padeyes

twist shackle

FH fastenen

(8 mm)

Use lour %B" (8 mm) FH fasteners

1 4.50" BIG BOAT B1OCKS I 4.50"big boat blocks are extremely useful for a variety of applications on offshore boats over 45 feet (13.7 m). They are used for mainsheets, running backstays, spinnaker sheets, foreguys, afterguys, halyard leads and reefing blocks.

SpmiuI FeaIum Three-way head system Rollerlball bearing system Removable beckets Stand-ups swivel and pivot 17-4 PH stainless shackles

C o m n S~IfiwIIons Sheave dia - 41/2" (114 mm) Shackle pin dia - 13/s"(10 mm) Max line size - % (16 mm) Max wire size - 5/16" (8 mm) 2% friction load - 6600 lbs (2994 kal Safe working load - 8250 lbs (374Z"kg) Breaking strength - 16500 lbs (7484 kg) AdQilimI InlormIion - See oaaes 40 and 41 for an exolanation of special features. See pages 4'2 and 43 for suggested uses. See pages 60 through 63 for blocks with stainless steel sideplates.

~ ~ n p ~ hmink

nucrlptlon 539 Single 540 Single wlbecket 541 Single 542 Single wlbecket 674 Stand up 675 Stand up

Kevlar Spectra Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Wire Rope Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra

9%" 248 mm 1 292 mm 9%" 248 mm l lV 292 mm 8a" 222 mm 8%" 222 mm

45 oz 1.28 kg 46 oz 1.30 kg 46 oz 1.30 kg 47 m 1.33 kg 5 6 oz 1.59 kg 5 4 8 oz 1.55 kg

Use four W (10 mm) FH fasteners Use lour h'(10 mm) FH fasteners

5 . 5 0 big &at blocks are useful on mainsheets of very large offshore boats and for halyards, backstays, reef lines, afterguys and sheets on racing and cruising boats over 50 feet (15 m). The large diameter sheave protects wire and rope while the very high breaking strength makes 5 . 5 0 big boat blocks suitable for extremely heavy loads. SphI Frrtnms Three-way head system Rollerlball bearing system Removable beckets Stand-ups swivel and pivot 17-4 PH stainless shackles

543 Single

conrmonSpe~IfIlGlNns

Sheave dia - 5'12" (140 mm) Shackle pin dia - 15/32" (12 mm) Max line size - %" (19 mm) Max wire size - 5/16'' (8 mm) 2% friction load - 8800 lbs (3992 kg) Safe working load - 10500 lbs (4763 kg) Breaking strength - 21000 lbs (9256 kg) AddiiiomI lnlarm8flion - See pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of special features. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses. See pages 60 through 63 for blocks with stainless steel sideplates. 48

545 Sinale

Spectra

279 mm

1.79 kg

Spectra

3 3 mm

1.93 kg 65 oz

Wire

546 Single wlbecket 676 Stand up 677 Stand uo

Rope

330 mm

1.96 kg

Win

9%" 248 mm

72 oz 2.04 kg

Use f o u r W (10 mm) FH fasteners

70 oz

Use four W 110 mm)

Rope Kevlar

7.00" & 8.00" "/G BOAT BLOCKS These enormous blocks were originally designed for

use on offshore racing catamarans over 70 feet (21 m) and are ideal for use wherever an exceptionally free running block capable of handling extreme loads is required. -

Three-way head system Removable beckets Stand-ups swivel and pivot

Rolleriball bearing system 17-4 PH stainless shackles

B. 00" Blocks

Common Specilica/ions 7.00" Blocks Sheave dia 7' (178 mm) Shackle pin dia Max line size Max wire size 20lrclonoaoSale Nor< ng oao Btead 110 slrenultl -

0 1203 mm1

518"'(16 mm)' 25/>z'" (20 mm) V'' (19 mm) 3ia" (19 mm) 5h6" (8 mm) 3~ i 1 0 mmi 13000oj,'5897dq 19000os8618~q~ 16500 CS ,/485 nq 24250 0s ,l 1000 <g 42000 os < l 9 0 5 1 d o t 61500 OS 127896 no. ~ddilionillnlorha/ion - See paJes40 and for an explanation of "' special features See paaes 42 and 43 for suaaested uses *Limited production item - Please allow u p f o five weeks for delivery.

Description

Sheave Groove

Length

Weight

604 7.00" slngle

Keviar Spectra

14'h" 368 mm

143 oz 4.05 kg

605 7 00" sngle wlbecket

Kevlar Spectra

16'A" 425 mm

151 oz 4.28 kg

Wire Rope Wire Rope

14%" 368 mm 16%" 425 mm

606 8.00 single

Kevlar Spectra

16'1'' 413 mm

234 or 6 63 kg

607 8.00" slngle wlbecket

Kevlar Spectra

18 457 mm

241 or 6 83 kg

686 8 0 0 s~ngle

Wlre Rope

16%" 413 mm

237 02 6.71 kg

687 8 0 0 sngle wlbecket

Wtre Rope

18'' 457 mm

244 oz 6 92 kg

684 7.00" slngle 685 7.00 single wlbecket

145 02 4 11 kg

153 02 4 34 kg

BIG BOAT FOOT B1OCKS

T h e loads on foot blocks are some of the highest that the running rigging can impose on a piece of marine hardware. Because of the magnitude of these forces, energy lost in the foml of friction can be substantial. Free running Harken big boat loot blocks use the Torlon balllroller bearing system to substantially reduce friction. 3 . 0 0 foot blocks with lockoffs allow sheets to be locked off to free winches during sail changes. 2 . 2 5 foot blocks use the hi-load combination bearing system and are designed for installations where the need for a compact foot block outweighs the need tor very low friction. Soecial Features P'] 0.1 I, an11wsnprs Bo I parlrrn sprraos oao ~ r q sIva e uvvs pass nocrtlez Addifionat hlormafion - See oaoe 40 ana 41 lor an ero ana: on 01 SOP: a lea[-rzc Szr paqzc 4'2 ;bu 43 lor s.lgyestpo .ses Srr pages 60 l ~ i r u ~ q63n lor o ocrts rq sla n ess step s ccp are8 Se? paqe 7 4 for foot block hole spacing.

Part No.

509

Skdlw Groom

DIDrlltionDiamnlar Single

5'h 140 mm 5W 140mm 5%" 140 mm 5'V 140 mm

513

Single

531

Double

532

Double

510

Single

514

Single

533

Double

534

Double

178 mm 7 178 mm

178 mm

7 178 mm

Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope

Maximm S i n Lllw Wlra

DwraII Lmglh

HDl, M

7%" 192 mm 7°/~6" 192mm 7 192 mm 79/!i1 192 mm 9'2' 241 mm 91%' 241 mm 9W 241 mm 9W 241 mm

1W 38mm 1KI. 38mm 2'9,s" . 72 mm 211/ti1 72 mm 1 38 mm 1W 38 mm 2'9!i1 72 mm 2'%6" 72 mm

Y" 19 mm

Y16"

8 mm

%" 19 mm

19 mm

8 mm -

19 mm

19 mm W 19 mm Y" 19 mm

716''

8 mm

%S"

8 mm

Wallhl

45 oz 1.28 kg 47 oz 1.33 kg 82 oz 2.32 kg 87 oz 2.47 kg 79 oz 2.24 kg 80 oz 2.27 kg 145 01 4.11 kg 147 01 4.17 kg

2% Rlulon 10sLoad

Sah Lord

Braking Slranolh

9700 lbs 4400 kg 9700 lbs 4400 kg 9700 lbs 4400 kg 9700 Ibs 4400 kg 13000 lbs 5897 kg 13000 lbs 5897 kg 13000 lbs 5897 kg 13000 lbs 5897 kg

12375 lbs 5613 kg 12375 Ibs 5613 kg 8050 lbs 3651 kg 8050 Ibs 3651 kg 22100 lbs 10025 kg 22100 lbs 10025 kg 14365 lbs 6516 kg 14365 lbs 6516 kg

24750 lbs 11227 kg 24750 Ibs 11227 kg 16100 lbs 7303 kg 16100 Ibs 7303 kg 44200 lbs 20049 kg 44200 lbs 20049 kg 28730 lbs 13032 kg 28730 lbs 13032 kg

halonefa lncludad

5 - W (10 mm)x 3 W (89 mm)

5-W(10mm)x 4'V (1 14 mm)

5 - 8" (12 mm) x 3h" (89 mm)

5 - K" (12 mm) x 5" (127 mm)

-Limited production item - Please allow up to five weeks for delivery omrlpiion

Di,mtl*

Shun Gmo~b

Maximum Sizo Lino Wire

Ovtnll Lcnlth

WM ,il

migl

2% Friction

S110

LOD told

Bruking Smqih

535

Single

8" 203 mm

Kevlar Spectra

3"' 19 mm

I17K 302 mm

l 44 mm

147 oz 4.17 kg

19000 lbs 30000 ibs 60000 ibs 8618 kg 13609 kg 27218 kg

536

Single

Wire Rope

W 19 mm

%s" 8 mm

11%" 302 mm

1%" 44 mm

147 oz 4.17 kg

19000 ibs 30000 ibs 60000 lbs 8818 kg 13609 kg 27218 kg

537

Double

8" 203 mm 8" 203 mm

W 19 mm

538

Double

8" 203 mm

601

Single

10 254 mm 10 254 mm

Kevlar Spectm Wire Rope Wire Rope Wire Rope

11%" 302 mm 11%" 302 mm 1511s'' 397 mm 15%~" 397 mm

3'K 83 mm 3'1." 83 mm 1%" 44 mm 3'K 83 mm

26202 7.43 kg 26202 7.43 kg 230 oz 6.52 kg 427 oz 12.11 kg

19000 lbs 8618 kg 19000 lbs 8618 kg 24000 lbs 10886 kg 24000 lbs 10886 kg

602

Double

19 mm 1" 25 mm 1" 25 mm

5/,s"

8 mm %s"

12 mm %s"

12 mm

30000 lbs 13609 kg 30000 ibs 13609 kg 43000 ibs 19484 kg 28667 lbs 13004 kg

60000 ibs 27218 kg 82000 ibs 27218 kg 86000 lbs 38969 kg 57333 ibs 2M108 kg

FI&MR lnclrdld

5 - H" (12 mm) X 4 ' k (114 mm)

5 - %" (12 mm) X 6 (152 mm)

7 - %" (12 mm) X 4 W (114 mm) 7 - %" (12 mm) X 6 (152 mm)

H A m Y E M "m-

e. -

DECK ORGANIZERS D e c k organizers are used to lead multiple lines to halyard stoppers or winches. They are used for halyards, reef lines, outhauls, pole lifts and any other control lines which must be lead aft from the mast base. Organizers are also perfect for many other applications which call for a multiple sheave cheek mounted lead block.

Common SpiCwlions Sheave dia - 2'V (57 mm) Fasteners - 3U (10 mm) hex head Fastener spacing - 2%" (70 mm) Max wire dia - 5/16" (8 mm) Max line size - %" (12 mm) Height - ll/a" (29 mm) Safe working load per sheave 4950 lbs (2245 kg) Breaking strength persheave 9900 lbs (4491 kg) Addilml l l n o ~ f i o n- See Daoes 40 and 41 for an exnlanation of spec al leat~res See pages 4'2 and 43 for suggesleo usks See pages 60 IhrO~gh63 for blocks wltn slam ess slee s~deplates Spscll F#aIum Self-contained sheaves Compact length Low profile construction Hardkote anodized aluminum

~ucrlptlrn 724 Two sheave 725 Three sheave 726 Four sheave

Lmvh

WoIgM

Tobl S ~ l sWorking bld

Bmkliq

Tobl

791,i' 156 mm 10 %a'' 262 mm

19% oz 553 g 27% oz 780 g

4950 Ibs 2245 kg 7425 lbs 3368 kg

9900 lbs 4491 kg 14850 lbs 6736 kg

1311~< 332 mm

35 W 992 o

9900 lbs 4491 ka

19800 lbs 8981 ka

Stnngth

596,597

SPREACHER BLOCKS -

Spreachers are ideal spinnaker sheet lead blocks for offshore boats. The double in-line sheave configuration permits use of the block for blooper and reacher sheets and simplifies inside-out spinnaker changes. Harken spreachers feature large diameter sheaves riding on our exclusive Torlon mllerlball bearing system for minimal friction and maximum sheet protection. The secondary sheave on the 722 and 723 uses a high load bearing which insures that, despite its small diameter, the sheave can handle even the high loads of reaching in heavy air. Spreachers are designed to pass shackles through the Swallows of both sheaves (except 596 and 597) to facilitate leading new sheets during sail changes. SpsciaI FrUvm Hanging tab Three-way head system Rollerlball bearing system Kevlar or wirelrope sheaves

llddlltwrli~ See pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of special features. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses. See pages 60 through 63 for blocks with stainless steel sidesplates.

S l h Worklng 2% Rlcllw Los hd Load Prlmry Suonlary

Brwkln~ 81wglh

NO.

Slim 6nm

rrlmq

555

Wire Rope

4 102 mm

3" 76 mm

12 305 mm

36 oz 1.02 kg

4950 lbs 2245 kg

3600 1bs 1633 kg

3000 Ibs l361 kg

556

Kevlar 4%" Spectra 114 mm

3" 76 mm

14'K 362 mm

60 oz 1.71 kg

8250 Ibs 3742 kg

6600 1bs 2994 kg

3000 Ibs 16500 lbs 1361 kg 7484 kg

583

Wire Rope Wire ~ope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Kevlar Spectra

4W 114 mm

3" 76 mm

14'K 362 mm

60 oz 1.71 kg

8250 Ibs 3742 kg

6600 Ibs 2994 kg

3000 Ibs 16500 1bs 1361 kg 7484 kg

5'F 140 mm 5'h 140 mm

4%" 114 mm

18W 470 mm

101 or 2.86 kg

10500 1bs 8BOOlh 4763 kg 3992 kg

48" 114 mm

18%" 470 mm

98or 2.78 kg

10500 1bs 8600 lbs 4763 kg 3992 kg

5h' 140 mm 5%" 140 mm 4 102 mm

4K" 114 mm 4'11" 114 mm 76 mm

16%~" 9602 411 mm 2.72 kg 16%< 94 m 411 mm 2.66 kg 12 36 oz 305 mm 1.02 kg

3 76 mm

2'K 57 mm

9'12" 241 mm

3 76 mm

2%" 57 mm

9%" 241 mm

593 594 596 597 658 722 723

Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra

S * m Olnlt8r 8*1*1ry

10500 Ibs 4763 kg 10500 1bs 4763 kg 4950 lh 2245 kg

8800 Ibs 3992 kg 8800 Ibs 3992 kg 3600 lbs 1633 kg

25 m 708 g

4950 lbs 2245 kg

3000 lbs 1361 kg

2501 708 g

4950 lbs 2245 kg

3000 Ibs 1361 kg

9900 1bs 4491 kg

W O lbs 2994 kg 6600 1bs 2994 kg 6600 Ibs 2994 kg 6600 Ibs 2994 kg 3000 lbs 1361 kg

21000 1bs 9526 kg 21000 1bs 9526 kg

7300 lbs 331 1 kg

21000 1bs 9526 kg 21000 1bs 9526 kg 9900 Ibs 4491 kg

7300 lbs 3311 kg

Parallel

Shackle Posts Perpendicular

Tang Plate

TITANIUM & STAIN1ESS RUNNER BLOCKS Running backstay blocks must be extremely strong and reliable but they must also be as small and light as possible. Harken's runner blocks offer reliability and strength in lightweight. compact blocks. Titanium runner blocks are state of the art hardware for serious offshore boats. After years of effort in our Custom Division, we have perfected the art of machining and welding 6-4 titanium to the point where we can offer production fittings of this high-tech material. Titanium has unique properties which make it eminently suitable for sailboat hardware. It is virtually corrosion proof and has amazing strength coupled with low weight. Even mass produced, however. the cost of titanium cannot be justified for every fitting. Runner blocks are one case where titanium's advantages are cost effective. The lightweight sideplates allow us to use larger sheaves to protect runner tails and still produce the lightest block possible. The aluminum sheaves have lightening holes and our high load compositelball combination bearing. The 3 stainless runner block is an economical alternative for boats ranging from fractionally rigged half tonners to some 40 footers (12 m). The 796 & 797 offer these boats titanium performance. Blocks are sold without heads. Choose a tang plate or a shackle post head. Runner blocks must be sized according to the runner and checkstay wire sizes. Special Fsslures Hi-load sheaves Computer designed sideplates Kevlar or wirelrope sheaves 17-4 PH stainless shackles Addilional lnlormalion - See pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of special leatures. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses.

O ~ S U I ~ ~ IS OM ~ ~ (Sham

single Stainless Single

796 Titanium Single

797 Titanium Sinale

Rm~r WIN

5000 lbs 2268 kg 5000 1bs 2268 kg

100M) Ibs 14 oz 4544 kg 397 g 10000 lbs 14 oz 4544 kg 397 g

Kevlar

5000 Ibs 2268 kg

10000 lbs 4544 kg

l 1 oz 312 g

6 mm

5000 Ibs

10000 lbs

11 02 312 a

6 mm

76 mm Spectra 3

Wire RoDe

76 mm

~ucrl~~mu

&B: 737. 738

747 3" Stainless

737, 738

739

MaKhUrn

W*llk

Wire Rope 3 Kevlar 76 mm Spectra

76 mm

Shackle past front or side

740

Bmtiul

LOI~

737 Stainless 738

W 'Ola I~IU~

tang plate Tang plate

796, 797

798 Perpendicular

796. 797

799 Parallel

796, 797

shackle post shackle post

2268 ka

4544 ka

Ruun W~I~M

7 oz 198 g 3 oz 85 9 2 oz 57 Q 5 oz 142 g 5 oz 142 g

'h"

6 mm 'h" 6 mm

'K 'h"

CkkW

PIU

Olamalar

Olamr

12 mm

6 mm

,h"

7/16"

,h"

12 mm

6 mm

m 55

Part

Shun DsrrlplbnOlam,r

696 Titanium 697 705 706 698 699 707 708

single Titanium single Titanium becket Titanium becket Titanium Single Titanium single Titanium becket Titanium

4 102 mm 4 102 mm 4 102 mm 4"

102 mm 5

127 mm 5"

Shm

Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire Rope Kevlar Spectra Wire

Warklnl Loll

6250 Ibs 2835 kg 6250 lbs 2835 kg 6250 Ibs 2835 kg 6250 lbs 2835 kg 10900 lbs 4944 kg 10900 lbs 4944 kg 10900 l$ 4944 kg 10900 lbs '"" kg

Wllph

12500 lbs 5670 kg 12500 lbs 5670 kg 12500 lbs 5670 kg 12500 lbs 5670 kg 21800 lbs 9888 kg 21800 lbs 9888 kg 21800 lbs 9888 kg 21800 lbs 9888 kg

15 oz 425 g 15 oz 425 g

17 oz 482 g 17 oz 482 g 28 oz 794 g 28 oz 794 g 33 oz 936 g 33 oz 936 g

Maximum Avlrnr WIR g/=''

7 mm 7 mm +/we

7 mm "ul'=/*

7 mm I/?C 8 mm %i'

8 mm 8 mm

J/?s

8 mm

Dsrrlplbn

Fill

Bkla

741 Perpendicular 696,697 shackle post 705,706 742 Parallel 696,697 shackle post 705,706 743 Perpendicular 698,699 shackle post 707.708 744 Parallel 698,699 shackle post 707,708 748 Tang plate 696.697 705.706 749 Tang plate 698.699 707,708

YhlpU

Runl Pin Dllmllsr

7 oz 198 g 7 02 198 g 14 oz 397 g 14 oz 397 g 3 02 i/ta", 8".%S",%" 85 g 8 mm. l0 mm. l2 mm 4 oz 8". '136''. '12'' 1139 1

."--."-

k W

Pln ~lmasr

%"'

6 mm, 8 mm, IOmm, 12 mm

Osrcripiion

Fits Blocb

WnipM

Ruflwi Pin Olamrlsr

Ckkstly Pin Dlamur

745 Perpendicular 700, 701 shackle post 709, 710

18 oz 510 g

746 Parallel shackle posl

700, 701 709, 710

l 6 02 510 g

750 Tang plate

700, 701 6 oz 'he", ' h . Yls''. Y1111 V<, 'l>&'', 709.710 1709 12 mm. 14mm. 16mm 10 mm, 12 mm

1730 Perpendicular 1726. 1727 47 oz shackle post 1728, 17291.33 kg 1731 Parallel 1726, 1727 47 oz shackle post 1728, 17291 3 3 kg 1732 Tang plate

1726, 1727 12 oz 172817293400

% , 'l8'' 19mm22mm

l/2", W 12mm16mm

TlTANlUMSWlVEL BLOCKS stanium swivel blocks are designed for nocompromise boats which are looking for the ultimate in high-strength, lightweight hardware. Titanium has unique properties which make it eminently suitable for sailboat hardware. It is virtually corrosion proof and has amazing strength cou~ledwith low weipht. 1-6 lightvieight sideplates and heads are 6-4AL titanium for the best strength. The bails are shaped to hold sheets on the blocks while penitting the block to articulate close to the deck. Shackle heads are designed to swivel to insure fair leads and feature the three-way head system which allows the block to be locked in a front or side shackle configuration to prevent twists. The aluminum sheaves have lightening holes and our high load composite1 ball combination bearing. Titanium swivel blocks are available in four sizes with either wirelrope or KevlarlSpectra grooves. They are used for many functions on boats from 33 feet (10 m) including, wnning backstays, mainsheets, spinnaker sheets and guys, halyard leads and control lines.

Spssirl lMwu Hi-load sheaves Cornp~terdeslgned s~aeplates Kev arlspectra or w~relropesheaves 17-4 PH sla nless shackles AddhIw,l I ~ B- See O pages 40 and 41 lor an explanarion of specla leal~res.See pages 42 and 43 for suggestid uses. 58

NO.

0i1mor

LOW~ W ~ I ~ M

MXI

~ilr

Wirs Siza

Sn i

M Wortim L d

Billy Black Phom

3 TITANIUM STAND UP BLOCKS

Titanium stand up blocks are designed for state-of-the-art boats which need the strongest, lightest gear possible. The titanium sideplates, heads, and padeyes are 6-4AL titanium for ultimate strength. The block swivel heads are captive on a titanium padeye for the lowest possible lead with full articulation and the stand up device allows the block to follow leads even in light air. Bails are shaDed to hold sheets on the blocks while permitting the block to pivot close to the deck. The aluminum sheaves have lightening holes and our high load compositelball combination bearing. Titanium stand up blocks are available in four sizes with either wirelrope or Kevlarl Spectra grooves. They are used for many functions on boats from 33 feet (10 m) including mainsheets, running backstays. spinnaker guys, halyard leads and control lines.

S p i a l Featurn

Hi-load sheaves Computer designed sideplates KevlarlSpectra or wirelrope sheaves Stand uo base Integral'padeye Adliloml IntormIion - See pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of special features. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses.

3 STAINLESS STEEL BLOCKS

Stainless steel blocks bring the reliability and performance of Harken big boat blocks to cruising sailors who prefer the rich look of polished stainless steel blocks. Stainless steel blocks are standard Harken big boat blocks with all of the features of their aluminum counterparts. They feature Torlon rollerlball bearings for low maintenance performance. Sheaves and head ~iecesare 6 0 6 1 - ~ 6aluminum which is ~arbkoteanodized with Teflon impregnation for lightweight strength and maximum corrosion resistance. Sideplates are 316 stainless steel hand polished to a high luster.

We offer the most popular Harken big boat hanging and foot blocks in sizes suitable for boats from 33 to 90 feet ( l 0 to 27 m). Other sizes and configurations are available through our Custom Division. Stainless steel big boat blocks are offered with sheaves scored for wire or rope. KevlarISpectm sheaves are available by special order. SprcI11 Frdwrr Hand polished stainless sideplates Rollerlball bearing system AddHhl ihwmtioa - See page 74 for foot block hole spacing. Refer to pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of special features. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses. 60

Mr.

W Mll,

Olccdpllon

760 3.00' (76 mm) Single 761 3.00' (76 mm) Single wlbecket 1735 3.00 (76 mm) Stand up 762 4.00' (102 mm) Single 763 4.00' (102 mm) Single wlbecket 1736 4.00' (102 mm) Stand up 778 4.00'13.00" (102mml 76 mm) Spreacher 1741 4.00'13.00" (102 mm1 7fi mm1 Fiddle

6'12" 165 mm 7%" 197 mm 61h" 165 mm 7'h" 191 mm 8%" 222 mm 7" 178 mm 12" 305 mm 11"

27 oz 770 g 31 m 870 g 36 oz 1.02 kg 36 oz 1.03 kg 40 oz 1.15 kg 45 oz

1.28 kg 59 oz 1.68 kg 52 oz

MaxlmuuS l n ' % E l m flop win

lard

l" %S" 3000 Ibs 3650 Ibs 12 mm 8 mm 1361 kg 1656 kg B" %s" 3000 Ibs 3650 Ibs 12 mm 8 mm 1361 kg 1656 kg B" %s" 3000 Ibs 3650 1bs 12 mm 8 mm 1361 kg 1656 kg H" l/h" 3600 lbs 4950 Ibs 12 mm 8 mm 1633 kg 2245 kg 'h" %d' 3600 1bs 4950 Ibs 12 mm 8 mm 1633 kg 2245 kg h %S" 3600 Ibs 49% lbs 12 mm 8 mm 1633 kg 2245 kg 'h" %6 3600 Ibs 4950 lbs 12 mm 8 mm 1633 kg 2245 kg h %6 MOO lbs 4950 Ibs

779 mm l d7 kn l 7 mm R mm

1633 kn

7745 kn

nmklng Bmlum huhlw

7300 lbs 3311 kg 73W lbs 3311 kg 73W lbs 3311 kg 990 Ibs 4491 kg 990 lbs 4491 kg 9900 Ibs 4491 kg 99W lbs 4491 kg 9900 Ibs 4491 kn

504 505 670 588 589 672 555

Part

No.

Wnilhf

Ornipion

764 4.50 (114 mm) Single 765 4.50 (114 mm) Single wlbecket 1737 4.50 (114 mm) Stand up 779 4 . 5 0 1 3 0 0 (114 mm1 76 mm) Spreacher 766 5 . 5 0 (140 mm) Single 767 5 . 5 0 (140 mm) Single wlbecket 1736 5.50 (140 mm) Stand up 578 Two sheave deck organizer 579 Three sheave deck organizer

9 V 246 mm 111 292 mm 63/a" 222 mm 14IW 362 mm 1 279 mm 13" 330 mm 9%" 246 mm

7%s" 156mm 10%s" 262 mm

66 02 1.95 kg 77 02 2.2 kg 74 01 2.1 kg 97 oz 2.75 kg 95 oz 2.71 kg 103 oz 2.92 kg 104 02 2.95 kg

M~XI~UI~

Rlp

2%Lo':nLa,d Wlrni a

W Ill< 16 mm 8 mm W Yls" 16 mm 8 mm

%S''

16 mm K" 16 mm W 19 mm W 19 mm W 19 mm

8 mm YI< 8 mm %s" 6 mm %G"

6 mm %d' 8 mm 2902 517r'' 8229 12mm 8mm 41 az %" %a' 1.16 ko 12 mm B mm

6600 Ibs 2994 kg 6600 Ibs 2994 kg 6600 Ibs 2994 kg 6600 lbs 2994 kg 8800 1 b 3992 kg 6800 lb 3992 kg 6800 lbs 3992 kg

Bmklnp 4Juininun Slnneh Qvinlnnt 6250 Ibs 16500 Ibs 3742 kg 7484 kg 6250 Ibs 16500 Ibs 3742 kg 7484 kg 6250 ibs 16500 Ibs 3742 kg 7484 kg 8250 Ibs 16500 ibs 3742 kg 7484 kg 10500 Ibs 21000 Ibs 4763 kg 9256 kg 10500 Ibs 21000 Ibs 4763 kg 9256 kg 10500 1bs 21000 Ibs 4763 kg 9256 kg 4950 lbs 9900 Ibs 2245 kg 4491 kg 7425 Ibs 14850 1bs 3366 ko 6736 ko

541 542 674 583 545 546 676 724 725

*Limited production item

Oueription 776 8.00(203mm) Foot block 777 8.00 (203 mm) Double foot block 1742 10.00" (254 mm) F w ~block 1743 10.00 (254 mm) Double foot block

- Please allow up t o five weeks for delivery,

Length 1 1 302 mm 11B" 302 mm 15Yw" 397 mm 15%~" 397 mm

W ~ I ~ M Maxinun Sire A o p Wln

203 oz 5.76 kg 346 oz 9.81 kg 348 ol 9.87 kg 604 02 17.12 ko

%d' 8 mm %s" 8 mm I" %I" 25 mm 12 mm 1 'Id 25 mm 12 mm

19 mm %' 19 mm

Sah 19000 Ibs 8618 kg 19000 Ibs 8618 kg 24000 1bs 10886 kg 24000 Ibs 10886 ka

30000 Ibs 13609 kg 20000 1bs 9073 kg 43000 Ibs 19484 kg 28667 Ibs 13004 ko

Brpklng l u n l u m Srsngih EquimIml 60000 Ibs 27218 kg 40000 Ibs 18145 kg 86000 1bs 38969 kg 57333 1bs 26008 ko

536 538 601 602

BIG BOAT SHEAVES

m i g boat sheaves are the foundation upon which big boat blocks are built. They are offered separately to give boat owners high quality sheaves for special applications. Big boat sheaves feature the Harken ball1 roller bearing system in which Torlon rollers carry the high radial loads while Delrin balls support side loads. Groove shapes are available to properly support Kevlar, Spectra, rope or wire running rigging. Wide sheaves feature combination grooves which will handle any material. When choosing big boat sheaves, care should be taken to choose a sheave based upon load carrying capability rather than physical dimensions. S@#/ Fsdul81 Torlon rollerlball bearing system Hardkote anodized, Teflon impregnated 6061-T6 Aluminum Kevar. Spectra, or wlrelrope grooves A d d H b l 1hmW See pages 40 and 41 lor an ewlanarion of speua leal~res.

HI-LOA D SHEAVES Hi-load sheaves are the heart of our standard running backstay blocks and big boat deck organizers. They are offered separately for replacements and for use in special applications which require a very strong, compact sheave. They are popular for use in masts and booms and for through-the-transom running backstay installations. Hi-load sheaves use a special bearing system which combines side load carrying balls with a Teflon composite bushing to carry the radial loads. While not as free rolling as the standard Harken balllroller bearing system, this hi-load bearing system is extremely durable and well suited to applications which must carry very high loads in a restricted diameter. Breaking strengths are based on the use of solid 304 stainless steel shafts.

S m i a l Fsslures ~iohtenino holes ~Hi-load biar1ngsystem Additional Inhrmation - See pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of special features. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses.

-~-

improves sail handling remarkably, speeding sail changes and allowing the use of smaller, lighter halyard winches. When used in steering systems, these sheaves return crucial "feel" to wheel steered boats. Because halyard and steering sheaves are subjected to very high loading. they feature a special bearing system which combines side load carrying balls with a Teflon composite bushing to carry the radial loads. While not as free rolling as the standard Harken balliroller bearing system, this high load bearing system is extremely durable and well suited to masthead and steering installations. Breaking strengths are based on a solid shaft of type 304 stainless steel. This strength will vary if other shaft materials are used. Special Features Lightening holes Hi-load bearing system Narrow width Additional Informalion - See pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of special features. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses.

691

692 693 694 695

718 719 720

721

Diemeter Width

Groove

Weighl

3 76 mm

Wire Rope

4%oz

W 16 mm

128 g

niameler ,v'' 12 mm

Maximum Sla Wire Line %' 10 mm

'11s"

5 mm

Wire

802

Ili'

71,s"

51)s"

102 mm 19 mm 5 I" 127 mm 19 mm

Rope Wlre Rope

227 g

12 mm

8 mm

6 l 152 mm 22 mm

Wire Rape

7 1'' 178 mm 25 mm

Wire Rope

27 az 765 g

25 mm

14 mm

Kevlar Spectra Kevlar Speclra Kevlar Spectra

8 oz 2279

'V 12 mm

3409

Kevlar

21,"

l02 mm 19 mm 5" 31r" 127 mm 19 mm 6 l 152 mm 22 mm

1" 178 mm 25 mm

Spectra

1201

Sale Working Load

Breaking

40W lbs 1814 kg

16500 lbs 7484 kg

8250 lbs 3742 kg 12000 lbs 5443 kg

16500 lbs 7484 kg 37110 lbs 16828 kg

Strength

3A"

71,s"

Yls"

19 mm

12 mm

8 mm

1902

539 g

19 mm

'l?" 12 mm

10 mm

16000 Ibs 7258 kg

37100 Ibs 16828 kg

l 12 mm

21000 lbs 9526 kg

66000 lbs 29937 kg

Ya" 10 mm

%" 10 mm

19 mm

8250 lbs 3742 kg 12000 lbs 5443 kg

16500 lbs 7484 kg 37100 lbs 16828 kg

19 az 539 g

air" 19 mm

'1,s"

16000 lbs

37100 lbs

12 mm

7258 kg

16828 kg

27 or

1" 25 mm

21000 lbs 9526 kg

66000 lbs 29937 kg

340g

12 oz

765 g

ll?'' 12 mm

Ys"

STEERING SHEAVES WITH BRACKETS

Steering sheaves are designed to put the "feel" back into boats with wheel steering. They lead the steering cables from the wheel to the quadrant and reduce friction in this highly loaded system to a minimum. Since steering sheaves are placed in the weight sensitive aft end of the boat, we use our 692 and 694 lightweight narrow sheaves. These sheaves feature a hi-load bearing system which combines side load carrying balls with a Teflon composite bushing to support the radial loads. There are four stainless brackets available for mounting steering sheaves. Pivoting brackets will lay over 45" to simplify alignment of the steering cables with the sheaves and quadrant. Fixed brackets are lighter and lower. All brackets feature bolt slots so that they can be twisted up to 10' for better alignment after installation. SpsGiai Fmtm 316 stainless steel brackets Large diameter sheaves Hi-load bearings llddiliwl inlomfion - See pages 40 and 41 for an explanation of special features. See pages 42 and 43 for suggested uses.

Owcrimon

sin

Fnltnr Scdnp

Load Angk-

C-.

Sale Wolklng Load

TITANIUM & STAINLESS STEEL PADEYES B d e y e s lill a m~lritudeof Jses on boats They are not only great for mo~nrinablocks, rhev are a so Jseo as attachment Dolnts for staysails, reefing blocks;and hundreds of other items o'n racing and cruising boats of all sizes. Harken offers padeyes in both stainless steel and in lightweight titanium. Stainless padeyes are available in three sizes. The diamond shaped padeyes, 688 and 689, are 316 stainless and are often used at mast bases where the diamond shape allows them to be mounted very close together. The 690 padeye is investment cast of 17-4 PH stainless. Titanium padeyes are extremely strong for their weight. They are of 6-4 titanium with a vapor honed finish. Considering the number of padeyes used on a modern racing boat, titanium padeyes offer an opportunity for significant weight savings. For maximum strength, always align padeye bails to the load. Comma Spcilimtim Fasteners - 688, 755: Use 'h'' (6 mm) FH 689.690: Use %S" (8 mm) FH 756: Use %" (10 mm) FH 757: Use %" (12mm) FH Omripiim

688 Small 689

diamond Large diamond

690 Square 17-4

755 Small 756 757

titanium Medium titanium Large titanium

3'1C

l 32 m l 35 mm

1Yd 30 mm

sits" 14 mm VC 22 mm

79 mm 3'1C 96 mm

2" 51 mm

M) mm

2Yls'' 59 mm

73 mm

Z3K 70 mm

70 mm

2'r 57 mm

1Y1..

38 mm 1'116"

27 mm

3" 76 mm

3%" 95 mm

28"

1Y!s"

30 mm

1'111

37 mm l%sm

'll~r"

21 mm h"

30 mm

16 mm

40 mm

191~~'' l 3 r 40 mm 44 mm

1Y' 44 mm

I 48 mm

1%~"

lHll

38 mm

lsllE

40 mm

2" 51 mm

25 mm I'ha"

27 mm

Cc-l

W~lghl

4% a2 135 g

I'hC

30 mm

7'11 ol 213 g 8 oz 227 g

'%C

2'1r oz

22 mm 27 mm lY16''

24 mm 1

38 mm 1%" 44 mm

71 g 6 az

170 g 11 02 312 g

Saf8 Workiq Load

3800 Ibs 5000 Ibs 4300 Ibs 1770 kg 2270 kg 1950 kg 8500 lbs 8000 Ibs 7800 Ibs 3850 kg 3628 kg 3540 kg 8500 Ibs 8600 Ibs 7800 Ibs 3850 kg 3900 kg 3540 kg 5000 Ibs 4500 Ibs 4300 Ibs 2270 kg 2040 kg 1950 kg 10000 lbs 6600 Ibs 8500 Ibs 4535 kg 2990 kg 3850 kg 20000 IbS 12000 Ibs 14000 Ibs 9070 kg 5440 kg 6350 kg

Bmkinu Shnuih 2

7800 Ibs 3540 kg 19000 lbs 8618 kg

17000 Ibs 7710 kg l0000 Ibs 4535 kg 20000 Ibs 9070 kg

8600 Ibs 3900 kg 15600 Ibs 7075 kg 15600 lbs 7075 kg 8M)O lbs 4080 kg 3900 kg 13200 Ibs 17000 Ibs 5990 kg 7710 kg 1M)OO lbs

4535 kg 17200 1bs 7800 kg 17200 Ibs 7800 kg 9000 ibs

40000 1bs 24000 Ibs 28000 Ibs 18140 kg 10890 kg 12700 kg

RUDDER BEARING INSTALLATION GUIDE Every rudder bearing installation is different but the suggestions below should help you determine the best method for your own boat. Tiller stasred bolt The upper bearing is normally a flanged bearing which is bolted to the deck or the cockpit sole (A). The tiller head rides on the inner race to transfer vertical loading to the rudder bearing (B). NOTE: set screws are intended only to keep the shaft from turning inside the bearing and are not intended to carry vertical loading of the rudder. Most retrofits will use a flanged upper bearing with the hub extension down because they do not have enough shaft length to use an upper bearing with the hub extension up. The lower bearing is normally secured to the shaft with set screws (C) and raised into the fiberglass tube carrying the shaft through the hull. The lower bearing is typically secured in one of two ways. Some people like to drill and tap the thick glass where the fiberglass tube is bonded to the hull (D) and secure the lower bearing with set screws. Other people like to use a sealant like 3M 5200 on the exterior surface where the bearing meets the hull (E) to keep the bearing from turning. Do not bed the lower bearing with a sealant as this may make removal very difficult. Whlll d l t r l d boal The upper bearing is normally a flanged bearing which is bolted to the deck or the cockpit sole (A). To transfer the vertical load of the rudder to the bearing, the emergency tiller head is often fitted to the shaft and rides on the inner race of the bearing (F). On some boats the top of the shaft will be fitted with a collar or a nut to transfer the vertical load of the rudder to the bearings. The lower bearing is normally installed like the bearing on a tiller steered boat, but provision should be made for a stuffingbox to keep water from entering the boat. In many cases, the fiberglass tube is cut off a few inches above the lower bearing (G) and a stuffing box (H) is bonded to this tube to provide a watertight seal.

Because a failure cannot be tolerated in a steering system, we will not sell rudder bearings without a consultation to determine the suitability of the bearing for your application. Please call or write our rudder bearing department with the following information so that we may do a computerized load analysis and specify the correct bearing for your boat. 1) Boat model 2) Length overall 3) Length waterline 4) Displacement 5) Rudder length (vertical depth of the blade) 6) Surface area of one side of the blade (or profile dimensions and we will calculate) 7) Distance between uooer and lower bearino ooints

Pod WO.

634 635 636

FIta

W C NO. 61 1 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 CI

637

620 621

638

623 624 625

c19

luldn niamtnr

wnlr

4.006" 1017 5 mm

17 oz 482 g

4.506" 114.45 mm

22 02 624 g

5.006" 127.15 mm

26 oz 737 g

5.506" 139.85 mm

30 02 851 g

6.006" 152.55 mm

35 02 992 g

Tubes available in these lengths: 2' (610 mm): 3' (914 mm): 4' (1.22 m):

Dolaefiptlol

630 Hanging tab

44 mm 25 mm

T h e 630 hanging tab replaces a washer on any 3.00, 4.00". 4.50" or 5.50" big boat block to allow it to be hung from the lifelines with shockcord. A 630 is standard on all spreacher blocks. Finding polished and machined low profile stainless steel bolts is very difficult so we are offering them at competitive prices with no minimum quantities. Our bolts have been machined, polished and passivated. They not only look better on your boat, but they are also less susceptible to stress corrosion and you have the assurance that they are high quality stainless steel. Each bolt comes with two washers and a nut. They are available in a wide range of sizes and lengths. All Harken foot blocks are provided with appropriate bolts, nuts and washers. Use these bolts as replacements or for other fastening requirements on your boat.

10 mm

D l/?<Suspends block

5 mm

from lifeline with

shockcord. Fits 3.00,, 4.00':

Bolts come with two washers and a nut

I ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS

2 2 5 (57 mm). 3 . 0 0 (76 mm) Faot Blocks 511, 528. 552, 553.653. 654, 768. 769. 1739. 1740. 1756. 1757,1758, 1759

h 00 703 r r r Foot R orrc 525 736 53: 538 "6 '-7 10 0 0 (254 mm) Fool Blocks 601, 602, 1742, 1743

4 5 0 (114 mm). 5 5 0 (140 mm). 7 0 0 (178 mm) Fool Blocks 508. 509. 510. 512. 513. 514.529. 530. 531. 532, 533. 534, 770, 771. 772, 773, 774. 775

pra

PSIi NO.

Can accept a variety of blocks match your boars needs.

Plvol nq macrle al o r 5 car to rol flee y even .n&r non-wensa oaos

\ I

Delrin or Torlon balls insure a noncorrosive bearing system.

v \

Horizontal bearing races allow a very low profile car design.

'~ecirculating Torlon balls ride directly on track so c a n won't bind under non-venical or twisting loads

, -Pivoting

cam arms permit traveler adjustment tmm a variety of positions in the cockpit.

\Cam-Matic cam cleats engage and release easily under all loads.

-Trim caps dress track endr and prevent sharp edges.

T h e Ultimate 30 is redefining the term performance dinghy. An evolution of the Australian skiffs, the Ultimate 30 is a multiple trapeze dinghy capable of planing upwind and challenging multihulls on reaches. Sailed for prize money and with heavy sponsorship commitments, Ultimate 30 sailors can't afford hardware which doesn't respond instantly to their every demand so Harken travelers are the hardware of choice. Harken travelers introduced the concept of the recirculating plastic ball bearing. They are designed to move freely under even high non-vertical loads. They also offer a multitude of other unique features that make them the lowest, freest running and most versatile travelers in the world. Five ranges of Harken travelers are available to fit any boat from the smallest, or largest dinghy, to the largest maxi boat. 76

Jqfi

Track is Hardkote anodized with Tellon impregnation for superiw corrosion resistance.

Track available in low profile or high beam configurations.

Ball Bearing Conlrol Blocks Ball bearing control block assemblies are available to fit small, mid-range and big boat tracks. Assemblies are available with and without cam cleats. Maxi traveler control assemblies feature big boat blocks and padeyes.

Hi-Beam Tr~ck 155, 560 and 1511 hi-beam tracks are designed to span cockpits or companionways without a support bridge. 560 and 151 1 track uses a patented sliding bolt attachment process which allows variable bolt spacing.

End Slops Every car, end stop and control assembly features energy absorbing bumpers to cushion the high shock loads of accidental jibes.

Angling Cam Cleals 209 and 210 cars feature Cam-Matic cleats on adjustable arms which can be set to the most convenient angle for your boat.

Windward Sheetina Traveler Cars The 211, 212, 247, 608 and 609 windward sheeting cars allow sailors to pull the car above the centerline without releasing the leeward control line. The car stays in position during a tack and can then be pulled above the centerline in the other direction.

Mainsheel Sheave Carriers Mainsheet sheave carriers pivot forward to allow fair leads when the boat is running.

Mjuslable Stops Adjustable stops are available for many tracks for use where control lines are not desired.

Swivel Ears and Low Pivoting Shackle Swivel ears allow a choice of control blocks and the low pivoting shackle allows load to be applied at severe angles without binding.

Trsveler Car Couplers Couplers are available to join some cars, increasing load carrying ability while maintaining the ability to roll on tight radii.

Dinghys & Light Daysailers Monuhulls

Mainsail Area

Mullihulls

End Boom Sheeting

Mid Boom Sheeling

End Boom Shnling

Mid Boom Sheeling

Under 70 It' Under 6 m2

156 157 171 209 211

156 171

157 209

156 171

157 209

70-100 1F 6 - 9 m*

156 157 171 209 211

156 171

157 209

158 172

159 210

100-130 11' 9 ~ 1 2m'

156 157 171 209 211

158 159 112 210 212

158 172

159 210

214

215

130-160 It2 12-15m2

158 159 172 210 212

158 159 172 210 247

214

215

- 1508

214

215

- 1508

Offshore Boats & Heavy Daysailers Under 90 It' Under 8 m2

158 159 172 210 212

90-1 35 It2 8-13mz

158 159 172 210 212

135-1 70 11' 1 3 ~ 1 6m'

212

214 215 247

215

170-225 112 16-21 m2 225-325 Itz 2 1 3 0 m'

1509

515

608

1509

515 584 608 558

584

600-750 11' 56-70 m2

- 586 609 21515s wl517

21515s w1517

750-900 It' 70-84 m2

1700 1705

1704 1708

900-1100 It2 84-102 m'

1700 1705

1704 1708

214 215 247

515 608

515

608

558 609

584

21515s wl517 1700 21558s w1752 '1705

1700 1705

17041708

159 210

158 172

159 210

158 172

159 210

214

215

1508

558

1704 1708

1704 1708 665 678 679 681 751

515

558

1700 1705

558

584

558 586 2 515s w1517

584

586 21515s ~ 1 5 1 7

21558s

1509

51 5

515

1508

- 515

1509

558 -- 586 609 21515s wl517

l700 1705

158 172

1508

1508 -- 1509

1508

3 2 5 ~ 4 0 0f12 30-37 m' 400-600 Itz 37-56 m'

247

158 159 172 210 212

586 21515s wl517

1704 1708

1700 1705 1700 1705

1704 1708

21558s ~ 1 7 5 2

1704 1708 665 678 679 681 751

665 678 679 681 751

custom

Custom

.---p

1100-1400 It' 1 0 2 ~ 1 3 0m2

665 678 679 681 751

TRAVELER USE CHART

This chart shows proper travelers for two categories of boats: Dinghys and small daysailers Offshore boats and heavier keel daysailers. Traveler specifications are based on mainsail area and the position of the sheet on the boom. Where an arrow is shown, use the larger traveler if your sail area is at the upper end of the range. 78

Purchase Recommendations lor Traveler Controls Sail Area Control Purchase Under l50 ft2 150 - 250 ft2 275 - 450 ft2 450 - 600 I t 2 Over 600 ft2

2:1 3:1 4:1 6:1 Winch

Harken tmveler kits are prepackaged sets of the most popular configurations of Harken small boat, mid-range and big boat travelers. Each kit includes a car, appropriate control blocks for the car, and the correct traveler control blocks for the track ends. Kits do not include track, trim caps, track fasteners or control lines. Package back describes how to choose appropriate track for each kit and shows correct control line for each assembly. Harken traveler kits are ideal for dealers and offer owners a convenient prepackaged set. Other configurations of traveler cars and control blocks and travelers for other sizes of boats are described in detail on pages 80 through 99 of the catalog. See pages 81, 84. and 87 for traveler track and trim caps.

Special Fblluros Recirculating ball bearing cars Pivoting cam arms Cam-matic ball bearing cams AMIIIonal Inlor~~lion - See pages 76 and 77 for an explanation of special features. See page 78 for suggested uses. See pages 174 and 175 for suggested traveler systems.

No.

Doltuipim

Tnvlr Car

Contml Blmks

Tnnbr Cmmb

Contmi

Purcbm

139

Small boat ttaveiel kit

21 5

Two 083

259 8 260

3:1

1536

Mid-range traveler kit

1509

Two 1515

1520 a 1521

4:1

561

Big boat traveler kit

51 5

Two 1515

564 & 565

4:l

Fils Tnck 142, 143. 154. 155 1510, 1511. 1535 515. 560, 758

Typiul loll

Lnngth

Muimum Mainnil Cm Mid Boom Shoeling End l w m Shctting

20' 2 7 6m-8rn 27 34' 8m-1Om

135 It2 12 mz 225 It2 21 rn2

170fP 16 W 275 11' 25 rn2

32' - 45' 10m-14m

300 Itz 28 m'

400 11' 37 m2

?a11

NO.

Harken small boat traveler cars are used on boats from the smallest dinghys to offshore boats as large as 27 feet ( 8 m). A wide variety of cars insures that you will find exactly the right system for your boat. Dinghy cars use Delrin ball bearings while hi-load cars use Torlon balls for greater working load. 1250 series cars feature a longer body and Torlon balls for maximum load carrying ability. Travelers with fixed sheaves and eyestraps are designed for situations where the mainsheet load is within 10 degrees of vertical. Cars with pivoting shackles are designed to accept loads up to 40 degrees from vertical without binding, though load carrying ability is decreased proportionally to the angle of loading. 209 and 210 traveler cars with fixed sheaves and adjustable cam cleats allow a very simple installation. The cams can be adjusted to suit a variety of cockpit arrangements.

Special Featurn

Recirculating ball bearings Pivoting shackles Choice of control blocks

C o n m Specificafioin

Width - 231is" (36 mm) Car body height - lY16" (24 mm) Ball dia - 'L" (6 mm) Track - 142, 143, 154, or 155 No. of balls - 40 (214 and 215 use 64) Addilionl I n ~ t i l i o n- See pages 76 and 77 for an explanation of special features. See page 78 for suggested uses. See pages 174 and 175 for suggested traveler systems. 80

Outrlplion

WcilM Maximum ~oad Clpacily

156 Car wlpiwting shackle

2%'' 5 02 73 mm 142 g

500 lbs Use for vangs, 227 kg self-tacking jibs

157 Car wlfixed sheaves & eyestrap 158 Hi-load car wlpivoting shackle

Z7I< 5 oz 73 mm 142 Q 2'K 5 02 73 mm 142 g

500 lbs 227 kg 850 lbs 386 kg

159 Hi-load car wlfixed sheaves & eyestrap

2'la" 5 02 73 mm 142 g

850 ibs Use only if load 386 kg is vettical

171 Car wlpivoiing shackle B swivel control block littings

2'ir" 5 oz 73 mm 142 g

500 lbs Use 082 for 227 kg 2 : l ; 083 for 3 : l

172 Hi-load car wipivoting shackle 2%" 5 oz & swivel control block fittings 73 mm 142 9

850 Ibs Use 082 for 386 kg 2:l: 083 for 3:1

Use only if load is venlcal Use for vmgs, self-tacking jibs

209 Car wlfixed sheaves & adjustable cam cleats

6W 171 mm 6%" 171 mm 4 w 111 mm

16 oz 500 lbs Use only if load 454 g 227 kg is venical 210 ~ i - l o a dcar wlfixed sheaves 16 oz 850 lbs Use only if load & adjustable cam cleats 454 g 386 kg is venical 214 1250 car wlfixed sheaves 9 oz 1250 its Use only if load B eyeshap 255 g 567 kg is vertical 215 1250 car wlpivoting shackle 4 9 oz 1250 lbs Use 125 for & swivel control blockfittlngs 111 mm 255 g 567 kg 2.1; 126 for 3:l 175 Car coupler 1500 lbs Joins two 158 cars to 680 kg increase working load 176 20 Replacement Delrin balls Fits 156. 157, 171, 209 B 211 cars 177 20 Replacement Torlon balls

Fits 158, 159, 172. 210. 212, 214, 215 8 639 cars

iSMALL BOAT TRACK 1 S m a l l boat tracks are available in low profile or high beam configurations. Low profile track should be used when the track can be supported at each fastener hole. Hi-beam track should be used when spanning a cockpit or other unsupported area. See chart below for spanning capability of small boat track. Either track will accept any sman boat car.

Aclual Size

1-- 4

155,143

nr;2'

End Slops and Trim Caps All track is supplied without end stops. 173 and 174 ends are designed for small dinghys and low load situations. 263 and 264 heavy duty end stops are designed to absorb the shock loads of unintentional jibes and are for use on larger dinghys and small keelboats. 261 and 262 trim caps are designed to finish the ends of track when control block assemblies are used. Curved

Common Speclllcallnns Track width - '/a" (22 mm) Hole spacing - 154. 155:4" (102mm)

142,143:100 mm (3'5/?6")

Fasteners - $1 0 (5mm) FH Weight - 154,142:5.1 ozlft (479glm) 155,143: 6.3 ozlft (596glm)

No Spanning 42

,07 m)

154 142

156-159. 171, 172, 209-212

142 154

214. 215. 247

155 143

156, 157, 171, 4 6 (1.22 m) 4 2 ( 1 0 7 m ) 209,211

155 143

158.159.172. 210. 212

36..

155 143 155 143

Two 158s w1175

18.. (457 mm) 42.. (1.07 m)

247

Fasteners261 Not

Capability 80" (2.03 m)

42..

262

Qir

263

Spmning and Bonding Cap8biillils Maximum Minimum Bond Tnnler Car U n r l p h d Sv8n R8diu

g;:N/E$:

6 l 7

Track

Harken will bend any track to your specifications at a modest additional charge. Horizontal, vertical or compound curves can be made. Refer to page 100 for infomlation regarding track bending.

Track

-- I )

07m)

20" (508 mm) 8 0 (2.03 m)

Low Prolile Track Pan 10. Part NO.

Hi-beam Track Part NO. Pan No.

154-24

142-24

155-24

143-24

2 4 (61 cm)

154-39 154-48

142-39 142-48

155-39 155-48

143-39

39(100cm)

143-48

48" (122 cm)

154-60

155-60

143-60

60" (150 cm)

154-72

142-60 142-72

155-72

143-72

7 2 (182 cm)

154-84

142-84

155-84

143-84

8 4 (210 cm)

154-99

142-99

154-120

142-120

155-99 155-120

143-99 143-120

9 9 (250 cm) 1 2 0 (300 cm)

154-144

142-144

155-144

143-144

1 4 4 (366 cm)

Llnglh

I P'

TRAVELER CONTROLS S m a l l boat traveler controls make Harken small boat travelers complete systems. Control blocks allow simple installation of purchases from 2:l to 4.1. Assemblies secure to the traveler track itself so no additional holes in the boat are required. Cams are mounted on pivoting arms so that control lines can be engaged or released from a variety of positions on the boat. The 255, single sheave control, is often used with the 211 or 212 windward sheeting traveler car to build a3:1 purchase. It isalso used on boats to 25 feet (7.6 m) to build a 2:l purchase for the 639 genoa lead car. The 258 is used on boats to 28 feet (8.5 m) to build a 3:1 tackle for the 639 genoa lead car.

canlnhul spsupsulialillIls Length - 4%" (108 mm) Width - lS/ie" (40 mm) Track - Fits 142, 143, 154, or 155 Fasteners - lY 16 mm) ~axlinesize-5/ie"(8mm) Sheave dia -1'Id' (29 mm) AMifiml In/11rm8fim - See pages 76 and 77 for an explanation of special features. See page 78 for suggested uses. See pages 174 and 175 for suggested traveler systems.

Spscll Frslures

Ball bearing sheaves 200 Cam-Matic cam cleat Pivoting cam a n Shock absorbing bumper

T m l 8 r C O I I I ~P u h I ~ ( ~ l l m l l t i e ~ Flrchu Under 100 It2 Under 10 m2 100 - 175 It2 10-16mZ

P811

NO.

Dmrlpbn

255 Single sheave traveler c~ltrol 258 Double sheave traveler control 256 Single sheave traveler control w1200 ram (port) 257 Single sheave traveler control ~ 1 2 0 0cam (stbd) 259 Double sheave traveler control w1200 cam (part) 260 Double sheave traveler contml w1200 ram (stbd)

m~vu 9 oz 255 g 11 02 312 g l 1 oz 312 g 11 02 312 g 13 01

367 g 13 oz

367 g

H8ifiN

Slh

raw, rnck

WO~IM Load

300 ibs 136 kg 600 lbs 272 kg

44 mm 2W

64 mm 2" 51 mm 2 51mm 2'h" 73 mn

2%"

73 mn

300 lbs 136 kg 300 lbs 136 kg 600 Ibs 272 kg 600 Ibs 272 kg

22 MOI ~ S 272 kg 1200 lbs 544 kg 600 lbs 272 kg 600 lbs 272 kg 1200 lbs 544 kg 1200 Ibs 544 kg

2 : i or 3:l purchase 3:l or 4:l purchase 2:1 purchase 2:1 purchase

3:l or4:l purchase 3:l or 4:1 purchase

MID-RANGE TRAVELER CARS & CONTROL BLOCKS ,

1509 Mid. 16111

Mid-range traveler cars are designed for use on offshore boats from 27 to 34 feet (8 to 10 m). They are compact cars with high free rolling loads. Two cars are available with a variety of track and control accessories to insure that you will find exactly the right system for your boat. Mid-range cars ride on recirculating Torlon ball bearings. The 1508 car is suitable for end boom sheeting on mainsails as large as 240 ftz (22 m2). The 1509 car is suitable for end boom sheeting on mainsails as large as 275 ft2 (25 m2). Mid-range traveler cars feature pivoting shackles which are designed to accept loads up to 40 degrees from vertical without binding, though load carrying ability is decreased proportionally to the angle of loading. Mid-range traveler cars are sold with no control block fixtures, but a variety of special control blocks attach to the cars to allow tackles from 2:l to 4:l purchase. These blocks will not hit the track or the traveler conlrols For 2 1 contro s ado lne 1513 S ngle conrrol blocks A 3'1 control 1s acnleveo by aaaing 1514 slng e conlrol oloc~swltn oecker To make 4:l controls use 1515 double control blocks. For 1 :l controls add the 1512 tang kit to the car to permit direct attachment of a control line or wire.

Conman Spsciliiwtim Width - 2%'' (70 mm) Car bodv heiaht - l l V (32 , mm) Ball d i a ' 5i16" (8 mm) Track - 1510, 1511 c% 1535 Addilnnal InlomlIon - See pages 76 and 77 for an explanation of special features. See page 78 for suggested uses. See pages 174 and 175 for suggested traveler systems. SpiaI F ~ ~ r o o Recirculating ball bearings Pivotina shackles Choiceif control blocks

Dlscllpfbn

LOnplh

WelgM

1508 Mid-range 4'K 10 a car 108 mm 284 g 1509 Long mid5 12 m range car 133 mm 350 g 1526 25 replacement 5/tETorlon balls

Maxlmum Load Capclly

No. ol hlls

1800 lbs 816 kg

End-bwmsheeting on mains to 240 ft*

2300 lbs 1043 kg

End-bwm sheeting on mains to 275 ft'

300 lbs

1508 & 1509 cars

600 lbs 2000 10s 777 kn

2000 Ibs 3:i W7 l,"

pur-

4:1 pur?h.-

Mid-range traveler track is available in either low pmfile or high beam configurations. 1510 and 1535 low profile track is a lightweight track which is ideal for installations where the track is supported for its entire length. It is used for many mainsheet traveler applications and is also perfect for genoa track, spinnaker pole track, and for luff track on full batten mainsails. 1510 and 1535 track is designed to mount on flat surfaces like decks and on curved surfaces like masts and booms. 1511 high beam track is designed to bridge cockpits and companionways without expensive bridge structures. It mounts with bolts riding in a channel in the bottom of the track. Bolt spacing is flexible, but at least three bolts should be placed together at each end of a span. See chart below for the spanning capabilities of midrange tracks.

End Smps and Trim Caps 1522 and 1523 end stops are energy absorbing polyurethane to absorb the shock loads of accidental jibes. 1524 and 1525 trim caps are used to finish the ends of track when control assemblies are used.

Cumd Tnrk Harken will bend any track to your specifications at a modest additional charge. Horizontal, vertical or compound curves can be made. Refer to page 100 for informa tion regarding track bending. cornnrcEnwII-

Track width - 1'11s" 127 mm) Hole spacing - 15101 4 (l02 mm) 1535: 100 mm (315186") Fasteners - 1510 and 1535: 'K (6 mm) FH 1511: 'K(6mrn) HH Weight - 1510 and 1535: 7 ozlft (655 glm) 1511: 16 oz/ft (1.5 kglm)

uaxiini

1535 1511

MI~IM

No Spanning Capability No Spanning Capability

1508

44" (1.11 m)

7 0 (1.78m)

1509

3 4 (856 mm)

9 0 (2.29 m)

1509

m) (229 m)

Fasteners Not

Included

3 MID-RANGE ITRAVELER CONTROLS I Mid-range traveler controls make tiarken mid-range travelers complete systems. Traveler controls allow simple installation of purchases from 2:l to 4:l. Assemblies secure to the traveler track itself so no additional holes in the boat are required. Ball bearing sheaves insure that cars can be adjusted under load and released instantly in a gust. Cams are mounted on pivoting arms so that control lines can be engaged or released from a variety of positions on the boat.

Spacial Fb#urcrr

Cornnwn @#Mations Length - 4lV (114 mm) Width - 1W (44 mm) Track - 1510, 1511, or 1535 Fasteners - =/is" (8 mm) Max line size - U" (10 mm) Sheave dia - 1%" (38 mm1 A M I ~ I#fomUon I - See pages 76 and 77 for an explanat on of spec~al lealures See paoe 78 for s~aqesled uses See .paws -- 174 ana 175 for suggested traveler systems. Ball bearing sheaves 150 Cam-Matic cam cleat Pivoting cam arm Shock absorbing bumper

TnWlM m m l P u h rum^^

Wlan IMm

Slil Am Mid-mm S M q

WBQM

Hll#M Abm

Slla Wmkiw B"k1ng W S t m

1516 Single sheave traveler mtrol

14 or 397 g

1%" 41 mm

300 lbs 1500 Ibs 2:l pur136 kg 680 kg chase

1517 Single sheave traveler control w1150 cam (pon) 1518 Single sheave traveler control ~ 1 1 5 cam 0 (sttd)

17 oz 482 g 17 oz 482 g

2W 67 mm 2W 67mm

300 lbs 1500 lbs 2:l pur136 kg 680 kg chase 300 lbs 1500 lbs 2:l plr136 kg €80 kg chase

Plrl

Dncripllol

Under 150ft2 Undwl4m'

Undw 125 It2 Undw 12 m'

1519 Double sheave traveler control

16oz 454 g

2" 51 mm

600lbs 1500 Ibs 3:l w4:1 272 kg 680 kg purchase

150 - 235 It2 14-22m'

125 - 200 fl* 12 - 19 &

21 oz 1520 Double sheave traveler control w1150 cam (pan) 595 g

2W 67 mm

21 oz 1521, Double sheave traveler controlw1150 cam (stbd) 595 g

2 67 mm

600 lbs 1500 lbs 272 kg 680 kg 600 lbs 1500 lbs 272 kg 680 kg

3:l M 4:1 purchase 3:l or 4:1 purchase

X1515 Cmtrol Blocks wllt515 Big Boat Car Contml blocks sold separately

3 BIG BOAT TRAVELER CARS

Harken big boat traveler cars are known as the best big boat travelen in the world. They have earned their reputation as the most sought after racing and cruising travelers because they roll freely under high non-vertical loads. Where others have failed. Harken has succeeded in bringing the ease of dinghy traveler control to the offshore yacht. Variations of the big boat traveler cars are available to fit boats from 32 to 65 feet (9.8 to 19.8 m). Big boat cars ride on recirculating Torlon ball bearings. They feature pivoting shackles which allow them to accept loads up to 40 degrees from vertical without binding, though load carrying ability is decreased proportionally to the angle of loading. Each car will accept a variety of control blocks allowing a modular selection of controls ranging from 1:l to 6:l. The 515 and 558 can are provided with attachment points to accept the 1514 or 1515 control blocks for 3:1 or 4:1 control tackles which do not hit the track or end stops, or the 659 swivel bracket which will accept a variety of control blocks. The 517 coupler is used to join two 515 cars for high load applications, particularly when the can must roll on a curved track or when multiple block attachments are desired. The 752 coupler is used with two 558 can for boats like 12 meters and Formula 40 catamarans which have very high sheet loads.

Spial Farlwar C~lnlmonSpss'licdlilions Recirculating ball bearings Car width 35/ia'' (84 mm) Pivoting shackles Car height - 136" (43 mm) Choice of cmtml blocks Track - 516, 560, 680, 758 or 759 Additional I h r l i o n - See pages 76 and 77 for an explanation of special features. See page 78 for suggested uses. See pages 174 and 175 for suggested traveler systems. 86

515 3000 Series car

557

1500 Series car

558 4500 Series car

5'K 133 mm 351~a'' 84 mn 7'K 184 mm

24 02 680 g 15 02

50 32

425 g

35 oz 992 g 23 02 652 g 28 02

3000 lbs 1361 kg 1500 Ibs 680 kg 4500 lbs 2041 kg 6000 lbs 2722 kg 9000 lbs 4082 kg

517 Caupler for 515 can

225 mm

752 Coupler for 558 can 547 25 Torlon

1OW 273 mm 794 g Fit 515. 554. 557. 558. 559 8 587 can

' 1

7000 lbs 3175 kg 5000 Ibs 2268 kg 9000 Ibs 4081 kg 12000 lbs 5443 kg l8000 lbs 8165 kg

Hall Size

516, 680, 758, 759

BIG BOAT

TRAY I

I I

Hall Size

B i g boat traveler track is available in either low profile or high beam configurations. 516 and 759 low profile tracks are lightweight tracks which are ideal for installations where the track is supported for its entire length. 680 and 759 tracks are low profile tracks with %6" (12 mm) holes spaced at 11/3" (34 mm) centers to accept 703 and 704 adjustable spring pin stops. They are often used for genoa track and for mainsheet or staysail traveler track when control lines are not desired or a positive stop is desired as a supplement to control lines. 560 high beam track is designed to bridge cockpits and companionways without expensive bridge structures. This track mounts with bolts riding on sliden in a channel in the bottom of the track. Bolt spacing is flexible but at least three bolts should secure each end of the track and two bolts should be placed together at each end of a span. See chart below for spanning capability of big boat track.

Fasteners Not Included

End Stops and Trim Caps 548 and 562 end stops are energy absorbing polyurethane to absorb the shock loads of unintentional jibes. 631 and 632 trim caps are used to finish the ends of track when control assemblies are used.

Curved Track Harken will bend any track to your specifications at a modest additional charge. Horizontal, vertical or compound curves can be made. Refer to page 100 for information regarding track bending.

632

C o n m Specifications

Track width - 1%" (32 mm) Hole soacino - 516. 680: 4 H02 mm) - 758; 759: 100 mm (3';/1/ls") Fasteners - 516 & 680: sl16" (8 mm) FH 560: 51r6" (8 mm) HH Weight - 516, 758: 12ozlft'(l.l kglm) 560: 40 ozlft (3.76 kglm) 680, 759: 11 ozlft (1.08 kglm)

LOWPToIIIo TRLl HI-bmm ~~~-~~ Rqulrr wlStop Hol8s Track P a n NO. P a n No. P m No. Pm No. P a n No. ~

Lrnpa

516-3 758-3 680-3 759-3 516-4 758-4 680-4 759-4 516-5 758-5 680-5 759-5

560-4

q(122m)

560-5

5' (1.52 m)

516-6

758-6 680-6

560-6

6' (1.83 m)

516-7

758-7

516-8 516-10 516-12

759-6

680-7 759-7 560-7 758-8 680-8 759-8 560-8 758-10 680-10 759-10 560-10 758-12 680-12 759-12 560-12

Track

3' (910 mm)

Mlxhlm Minimum Tnvoler Car Unupportod Span L n d Radius

516 758 680 759

557

B" (203 mm)

6' (18 3 m)

516 680 758 75g

515

8' (203 mm)

8' (2.44 m)

516 758 680 759

558

B" (203 mm) 18' (5.49 m)

$2!!!

Two 5151517 B" (203 mm)

(1.07 m)

8' (2.44 m)

560

557

6' (1.83 m)

560

558

30" (762 mm) 18' (5.49 m)

T (2.13 m) 8' (2.44 m) 10' (3.05 m) 12' ( 3 . 6 3

560

Two 5151517 K (914 mm)

8' (2.44 m)

BIG BOAT TRAVELER CONTROLS B i g boat traveler controls make Harken big boat travelers complete systems. Traveler controls allow simple installation of purchases from 2:l to 4.1.Assemblies secure to the traveler track itself so no additional holes in the boat are required. Ball bearing sheaves insure that cars can be adjlsted under load and released instantly in a gust. Cams are mounted on pivoting a m so that control lines can be engaged or released from a variety of positions on the boat. The 599 stop accepts a standard winch handle and is used to limit car movement on 516. 560. or 758 track when control lines are not desired. The 703 stop is used on 680 or 759 track to provide a positive stop for travelers or genoa lead cars. m e 704 not only serves as a stop on 680 or 759 track but also .. . serves as a bail for attachment of snatch

Also avalable w ~ fslamless i steel s~deolates

HI-LOA D TMVELER CONTROLS

Hi-load traveler controls are designed for use on boats with mainsails over 400 square feet (37 m2). They use big boat sheaves and hi-load aluminum sideplates to withstand the severe shock loading generated by unintentional jibes on large offshore boats. Hi-load traveler controls allow simple installation of purchases from 2:l to 6.1. Hi-load traveler controls are also suitable for aenoa lead car adjusters on offshore boats.

SpsEirlrnnr

cllIIhm-

Hi-load bearings 150 Cam-Matic cam cleat Shock absorbing bumpers Two bolts for strength

Length - 7%'' (194 mm) Width - 2'1~"(56mm) Track - 516,560. 680 mat lines&-'h"(l2mn)

Sheavedia- 2%" (57m) A l L l i t M /-ion - See pages 76 and 77 for an explanation of special features. See page 78 for suggested uses. See pages 174 and 175 for suggested traveler systems.

TnmkCld*hd-

ail Am uu*ram

wlmrmiy Undet 450 fP Undet 42 m'

450 6W ft2 42-56m' Over 6W It2 Over 56 m'

Untea 4W It2 Under 37 mZ

4W 550 ft2 37 - 51 m' O w 550 ft2 Over 51 IP

wlwinch

730 Single sheave hi-load traveler cmtrol 731 Single sheave hi-load travels cmtml wll50 can ( m ) 732 Single sheave hi-load traveler cmtml w1150 can (stbd)

33 oz 936 g 39 oz 111 kg 39 oz 1.11 kg

2K< 56 mm 2%" 56 mm 2%" 56 mm

2000 lbs 907 kg 7W lbs 318 kg 7W lbs 318 kg

4000 lbs 1814 kg 1400 lbs 635 kg 1400 lbs 635 kg

2:1 purchase 2:1 purchase 2:1 purchase

733 OouMe sheave hi-load trader cmtml 734 D d l e ssheve hi-load traveler wntml w1150 cam ( m ) 735 Double sheave hi-load traveler contml ~ 1 1 5 0cam ( S W ) 736 Tripk sheave hi-load travels cmtrol

40 oz 1.13 kg

3%" 81 mm

1400 lbs 635 kg

2800 lbs 1270 kg

3:1 a 4:l purchase

46 oz 1.30 kg

3Ki 81 mm

1400 lbs 635 kg

2800 lbs 1270 kg

3:i a 4 : t purchase

46 oz 1.30 kg

3Yd' 81 mm

1400 lbs 635 kg

2800 lbs 1270 kg

3:i a 4:l purchase

4502 1.28 kg

4Yd' 106 mm

14Wlbs 635 kg

2800lbs 1270 kg

5:1~6:1 punhase

1 IUU, l l U 4 , l /U3

Mini-maxi tmveler cars are designed for large offshore boats from 55 to 71 feet (16.5 to 22 m). Harken mini-maxi traveler cars ride on two rows of recirculating Torlon ball bearings so they are free rolling under even high non-vertical loads. One standard configuration of mini-maxi mainsheet traveler car is available in three variations to lit d lferent horizontal track rad~ Mini-maxi traveler cars cannot ride on ven~calrad Jnoer 75' f,-22.7 m\, Each standard mini-maxi car features a hi-load pivoting shackle and 2 . 2 5 control blocks for a 2:1 traveler control system. Other variations are avaiable on a special order basis. ~

SpskI M m CmnnmnSpIIIwIIons Recirculating ball bearings Safe Working Load - 8750 lbs (3969 kg) Pivoting shackles Breaking Strength -18000 ibs (8164 kg) Foot blwks for control blocks Length - 10" (254 mm) Width - 4V (111 mm) Height - 3%" (95 mm) Weight - 106 az (3 kg) Ball dia - '12" 112 mm) No of balls - 68 AMHW IRfOmlion- See pages 76 and 77 for an explanation of special features. See page 78 for suggested uses. See suggested systems on pages 172 and 173.

WO.

Ourrlplon

Minimum ladbus

1700 Mini-maxi car for straight track

1525m

1704 Mini-maxi car for curved track

7.32 m

1705 Mini-maxi car for

Muimum R8dlur

9.75 m

MINI-MAXI TRACK AND CONTROLS T w o configurations of low profile minimaxi traveler track are available. 1701 is a low profile track suited for most applications. It is commonly used for applications like mainsheet travelers. 1706 is a low profile track with holes for the 1708 adjustable stop. 1706 is typically used as a genoa track. Tracks are sold without end stops. End stops are available in a variety of configurations to suit every need. The 1703 provides a 2:l traveler control to lead to a winch. The 1708 adjustable stop is used to limit movement by genoa lead cars or to control mainsheet travelers when control lines are not desirable.

Curved Track Harken will bend track to your soecifications at a modest additional charge. Horizontal, vertical or compound

r w/~lopHola

H a k e n maxi travelers bring the ease of dinghy traveler adjustment to the largest of offshore boats. The Harlten maxi traveler is a development of the recirculating ball bearing principle which makes all Harken travelers free rolling even under high non-vertical loads. One standard configuration of maxi mainsheet traveler car is available in three variations to fit different horizontal track radii. Maxi traveler cars cannot ride on vertical radii under 100' (30.5 m). Each standard maxi car features a hi-load pivoting shackle and control blacks for a 2:l traveler control system. Other variitions are available on a special order basis.

m c s n m n u ~ Recirculating ball bearings Max load capacity - 12000 lbs(5443kg)

W i n g strength -25000 lbs (11340 kg) Pivoting shackles 511 f w t blocks for controls Length - 13'K (353 mm) Width 5'k" (133 mm) Height - 5" (127 mm) Weight - 180 oz (5.1 kg) Ball dia - Vt" (12 mm) No of balls - 100 Bhhs#en - See pages 76 and 77 for an explanation of ylecial features. See page 78 for SIIggeSted m. See pages 172 and 173 for suggested traveler systems. 92

Y Y L

nukn win

1W 30.5 m

665

Maxi m fw straight t

678

Maxi car fw c u d back

24' 7.32 m

9.75 m

Maxi car for curved track

16'

24'

679

32'

iMAXI TRACK & CONTROLS I T w o standard configurations of maxi track are available. Both are lightweight low profile tracks perfectly suited for mainsheet and genoa sheet applications on maxi boats. 660 is a low profile track suited for most applications. 661 is a low profile track with holes for the 664 and 668 adjustable stops. Tracks are sold without end stops. End stops are available in a variety of configurations to suit every need. The 667 is generally used to build 2:l traveler controls to lead to a winch. The 664 adjustable stop is often used to limit movement bv maxi oenoa lead cars or to control maxi mainsheet travelers when control lines are not desirable. The 668 adjustable stop with padeye serves a dual role as a stop and also serves as an auxiliary sheeting position on maxi genoa track.

Actual Size

C~mdTrack Harken will bend any track to your specificstions at a modest additional charge. Horizontal, vertical or compound curves can be made. Refer to page 100 for information regarding track bending. l%mm Spscifiufim - Track Width - 2%" (64 mm) Height - l'V (29 mm) Weight - 660: 33 ozlft (3.09 kglm) 661: 32 ozlft (3.01 kglm) Fastener hole spacing - 4 (102 mm) Fasteners - l/2" (12 mm) FH

*'No.

kiptiin

End stop

W ~ M II~I~M

663 End stop wlpadeye 664 Adjustable stap wlscrew

3%" 3F' 79 mm 95 mm 6%" 3%" 162 mm 95 mm 3W 3%" 90 mm 95 mm

2" 51 mm 3%" 86 mm 2 V Fits 661 64 mm track

666 Maxi end stop w l f w t black

6'K 3%" 175 mm 95 mm

86 mm loot black

667 Maxi end stop w l 6'h" 3%" becket foot black 175 mm 95 mm 668 Adjustable stop 6%" 3W wlscrew & padeye 162 mm 95 mm

3%"

umllr

hla

h* ir

Pad HI.

6MI-12

661-12

wI511

311" w l M 5 86 mm f w l black 311" 86 mm

12' (3.66 m)

,,.c.,

d .-" ;:; ', *:.;:!.;..: .~ ~..,- . . :,... ,. . .:1. l ',W-4. .j ~~

Cars not included 584

Cars not included

Cars not included Mainsheet sheave carriers are used with double ended mainsheets to give 2:l or 4:l purchases on larger offshore boats. These sheave carriers feature low friction Harken big boat sheaves or blocks to insure ease of mainsheet and traveler car adjustment under any load. Sheave carriers are designed to lay down within 15' of horizontal to maintain fair leads even when reaching and running. The 584 and 586 serve as a coupler for two 515 big boat cars. The 751 and 681 fit standard maxi traveler cars. These carriers do not include traveler cars. The 1765, 1766 and 1767 mini-maxi car and carrier and the 1768,1769 and 1770 maxi car and carrier include special cars and will accept either aluminurn, stainless or titanium swivel blocks. These assemblies are designed for applications where the sheet winches are not directly in line with the traveler track or the track is curved.

1 n ~ 1 ~ ~ ~= Blocks not

Spfflrl Fa4lWds Big boat mainsheet sheaves Carriers oivot No looseblocks Add/liOnrl I n ~ I o n See pages 76 and 77 for an explanatton of special features See page 78 for suggested uses hrt NO.

D8mlfllm

5W Small mainsheet sheave canier 586 Mainsheet sheave cwier 681 Titanium maxi mainsheet sheave canier 751 Titanium 4:l maxi mainsheet sheave canier 1765 Titanium 2:1 mini-maxi c a camier for swivel blocks 1766 Titanium 2:i mini-maxi car & camier for swivel blocks 1767 Titanium 2:l mini-maxi car 8 mnier for swivel blmks 1768 Titanium 2:1 maxi car8 carrier for swivel blocks 1769 Titanium 2:1 maxi car 8 carrier for swivel blocks 1770 Titanium 2:1 maxi car 8 canier lor swivel blocks

w h 10" 254 mm 16%" 425 mm 13%" 343 mm 12U" 311 mm 12 305 mm 12' 305 mm 12 305 mm 13W 349 mm 13%" 349 mm 13W 349 mm

Hol!M A h Tnrk 6W 165 mm 6 203 mm 9%" 235 mm 9" 229 mm 9" 229 mm 9" 229 mm 9

229 mm 10%257 mm IOW 257 mm 1OIV 257 mm

44 oz 1.25 kg 90 oz 2.55 kg 149 02 4.23 kg 12902 3.66 kg 149 oz 4.23 kg 149 oz 4.23 kg 149 02 4.23 kg 184 oz 5.21 kg 184 02 5.21 kg 184 02 5.21 kg

included

Includes car - Blocks not included Show0 Collml ~ l m ~ R r R 3.00" 4:1 76 mm 4.00 6:1 102 mm 5.50 2:1 140 mm 4.50" 2:l 114 mm 2:1

Shuw Block8

Radlus

5641565 or two 563 736

Included

B' (2.5 m)

Included

B' (2.5 m)

666 or 667

Included

666 or 667

Included

1703

Use 539, 541. 764 1712, or1713 Use 539.541. 764 1712, or 1713 Use 539.541. 764 1712, or 1713 Use 543, 545,766. 1714, or1715 Use 543, 545. 766, 1714, or1715 Use 543, 545. 766, 1714, or 1715

~ Blmk

2:l

1703

2:1

1703

2:1

666 or 667

2:1

666 or 667

2:1

666 or 667

Tmk

or greater or greater Choose 665, 676, or 679 car for radius Choost 665. 678. or 679 car for radius 50' (15.2 m) or greater 24' to 32' 7.3 to 9.7 m 16' l 0 24' 4.9 to 7.3 m 100' (30.5 m) or greata 2C to 32' 7.3 to 9.7 m 16't024' 4.9 or 7.3 m

WINDWARD SHEETIIYI; TRAVELER CARS W l n d w a r d sheet~ngtraveler cars br~nga new ease to traveler adjustment Cars may be pulled above the centerl~new~thoutreleas~ngthe leeward control l ~ n eTack and the car stays in the same posltlon on the track, ready to be pulled to the new weather s ~ d eOnce vou've salled with a windward sheeting car. iou'll wonder how you ever sailed without one. Windward sheeting travelers are available in five sizes for boats from dinghys to one tonners. Adapter kits are offered to fit most existing Harken traveler cars. The 21 1 and 212 feature a small boat traveler car. The 211 fits most dinghys while the 212 is used on larger dinghys like the Flying Dutchman and small offshore boats like the Jl24. The 247 uses a 1250 series car and can be used on boats as large as 26 feet (7.9 m) with mains to 175 ft2 (16 m2). The 608 uses a 515 big boat traveler car and is suitable for three quarter tonners and some offshore boats as large as 40 feet (12 m) with mainsails as large as 400 ft2 (38 m2). The 609 is based on a 558 and is used on boats like one tonners with large mainsails to 525 ft2 (50 m2). All windward sheeting cars have Cam-Matic cleats built into the control mechanism and are. thus, best suited to installations where the trav. eler track is at deck level. Controls cannot be led through turning blocks to a remote location.

Spscial F8alums Leeward cleat opens automatically Recirculatina ball bearinos " Pivoting shackles 150 Cam-Matic cam cleats Addilia1181 lnllwrnslon - See oaaes 76 and 77 for an explanar~onof specla l e a i ~ r i sSee page 78 for s,qqesleo Lses See paqes 174 an0 175 lor suggeifed traveler systems:

ooaeripion 211

Small boat car

212 Hi-load small boat car

247

1250 Seriessmall

608

3000 Series big

boat car

boat car 609 4500 Series big boat car 213 Small boat adapter kit 248 1250 Series adapter kit 610 Big boat adapter kit

Lanflh

width

69" 175mm 6'K 175mm

3'1?6" 78mm 3'h~" 78mm

6'K

3'Ar"

9slta"

5" 127 mm 5"

9q1tE

;t:k

N u m b Mulmum BrolYnu

Balh

23 oz 142. 143 40 6529 154.155 23 oz 142. 143 40

6529

154.155

27 oz

142, 143 154.155

61 oz 516, 560, 1.73 kg 758 72 oz 516. 560, 127 mm 2.04 kg 758

175mm 78mm 243 mm

W~I~M

7699

243 mm Fits 156, 157. 158. 159, 171 B 172 cars

load

Capacity

purcbso

stmnulh

500 lbs 1200 lbs 2:1 or 3:1 227 kg

544 kg

lbs 2000 lbs 2:1 or 3:l 386 kg 907 kg 1250 lbs 3000 lbs 2:1 or 3:1 850

567 kg 1361 kg 3000 lbs 7000 lbs 1361 kg 3175 kg 4500 lbs 10500 lbs 2041 kg 4763 kg

5:1 or 6:l 5:1 or 6 : l

Fits 215 car Fits 515 & 558 car

SPINNAKER POLE CARS I H a r m spinnaker pole cars are based on recirculating ball bearing travelers to permit adjustment under any load. They roll freely on low profile traveler track to allow the crew to adjust the inboard pole end for optimal sail shape on all points of sail. Five cars are available to fit boats from daysailers to offshore boats as large as 45 feet (13.7 m). Small and mid-range cars feature rings for end-for-end jibing. Big boat cars accept two popular toggle studs or the Harken bell end fittings. Control block attachments allow either 1:1 or 2:1 purchases. Spinnaker pole cars for larger boats or with other attachment configurations are available from our Custom Division. S p a 1 firturn Recirculating ball bearings Accepts most popular pole ends Cars fit low profile track AddllonrI IntormIiiw - See pages 76 and 77 for an explanation of special features.

-T

Harken Bell End (Not Included with Car)

Drrrriplion

Forespar Toggle (Not included with Car)

S118 M u Spin No. LBnllh WalgM Wlrking Sail d LDld Arm Blllt Trick

780 Small boat spin- 4W 15 OZ 1125 Ibs 900 it' nakw pale car 111 mm 4259 510 kg 85 m2 781 Mid-rangespin- 5'K naker pale car 133 mm 9'K 782 Big boat spinnaker pale car 235 mm

23 oz 652 g 38 02 1.1 kg

2100 lbs 953 kg 4050 lbs 1837 kg

142 154

Pole EM Fhlng Ring

1350 It2 60 1510 Ring 125 m2 1535 2000 It2 72 516 HIB 120 & 186 m2 758 130 bell end

783 Big boat spinnaker pale car

9'K 38 oz 4050 Ibs 2000 It2 72 235 mm 1.1 kg 1837 kg 186 m2

516 758

784 Big boat spinnaks pole car

9'K 38 oz 4050 1bs 2000 It2 72 235 mm 1.1 kg 1837 kg 186 m2

516 Forespar 758 toggle

Sparcralt toggle

ADJUSTABLE GENOA LEAD BLOCKS

T h e ability to adjust genoa lead block position under load has become crucial to success in offshore racing. Pulling the lead forward allows the crew to "power up" the genoa coming out of tacks or when sailing through lulls. Easing the car aft "depowers" the genoa to keep the boat on its feet in gusts. Cruising sailors use adjustable lead cars with roller reefing genoa systems. As the genoa is reefed, the lead car position must be moved forward to compensate. The ability to adjust lead car position from the safety of the cockpit is more than just a convenience. Harken adjustable genoa lead blocks ride on traveler car bodies with reliable Torlon ball bearings so that adjustment, even under extreme loads, is smooth and easy. These blocks feature wide sheaves which will pass two sheets. The 587 and 554 will pass two sheets with J-Lock or Presslock-type shackles. All pivot 40' to either side to accommodate changing lead angles and the 587 and 554 feature stand up springs. Maxi genoa lead cars with pivoting, swiveling or removable sheave carriers are available from our custom department.

Spacial FCIIUILP Recirculating ball bearings Pivoting sheave carriers Wide sheaves Dass two sheets Low orof le gkoa tracks AdditImI inlsr~i011- See pages 86 and 87 for an ex~lanaton of sDec~alfeatures. See .Daaes . 52 and 53 for suggested uses.

639 587

554

1250 Saies 3000 Series

4500 Series

2'h"

64mm 3 76 mm 4'h' 114 mm

1537

Mid-range

2'h' 64 mm

1250 lbs 567kg

2500 lbs 1134kg

3000 lbs 7000 lbs 1361 kg 3175 kg 4500 lbs 12000 lbs 2041 kg 5443 kg 2300 Ibs 4600 Ibs 1043 kg

2089 kg

2Yts" 56mm 3'lg 85 mm

5'1~" 140mm

142 154

8" 203 mm

516. 680

3'h" 85 mm

g3K 248 mm

2'K 70mm

5'h" 133 mm

759 516.680

1802

slog 48 oz

758.

1.36kg

758. 759

83 02 2.35 kg

1510 1535

3301 936 g

BATTEN TRAVELER SYSTEMS

Headboard couplers join two cars and accept a mainsail headboard. They are designed to spread the load of the leech across both can. The female double plate construction allows a headboard to fit between the plates. Multihulls and other boats with large roach areas should use larger systems or should use custom headboard cars to carry the very high leech loads. Batten end cars are offered with a variety of BATTSLIDE" batten end fittings. Battslide fittings protect sails from excessive wear by placing the batten end in a rugged one piece batten receptacle which removes the stress on the sailcloth next to the batten. The unique. patented*, multi-axis articulating link allows battens to move in all planes to reduce load on the sail and battens. The precise mechanical linkage holds the batten end in its intended position for optimal sail shape, a feature loose attachments cannot offer. Battslide fittings allow battens to rotate into a horizontal position when the sail is lowered so sails are easier to flake and furl and the wide range of movement allows the boom to be moved off of the centerline even when the sail is furled. For sails where the use of Battslide fittings is not desired, the 1776. 1781, and 1785 cars are designed to accept a variety of other batten end fittings. The short luff cars are designed for use between battens. They hold the luff to the mast to prevent scalloping between battens. Depending on batten soacino. one or two short luff cars will be used between each batten'. ~ h $luff cars are of a minimum length to keep the stack height of the system as short as possible. Harken batten traveler systems require the installation of Harken low profile track on the mast. Several lengths of standard Harken track will be required for each installation. Splice links are offered to hold tracks in proper alignment. Use the proper end stops foreach track. Choose batten traveler systems based on sail area. Owners of unusual boats should contact Harken for further details. Battslide cars are shipped with fasteners for attaching Battslide to the sail and one set of plastic sail grippers. ~

Harken batten traveler systems allow full batten mainsails to reach their full potential. Full length battens make mainsails last longer, give them a more powerful shape, and make them easier to trim. When coupled with lazy jacks, full length battens also make controlling the main easier when furling and reefing. Since full length battens are typically in compression, they can make raising and lowering the mainsail vely difficult. Harken batten traveler systems place the battens and headboards on recirculating ball bearing cars so that sails raise and lower without friction. Raising sails is easv and sails droo instantlv when the halvard is released. Batten t;aveler systems are avaiiable in three i z e s for boats from 30 to 80 feet (9 to 24 m). Each size range includes a headboard coupler, batten end cars and short luff cars for between battens.

~~~

'BATTSLIDE is a trademark of Sailpower Systems, Inc. BATTSLIDE patents are held by Sailpower Systems. Inc

BlH8n Trawler Sal8rlion Chart EM Car

Bmn

Holdhid Cr h m h l y

Shrt L d Car

225 Itz 21 W

1772

1771

1776

350 It2 33 m' 350 It'

1773

1771

1776

Mulnum S111 Am Mllhull

M#mhll 275 ft2

26 W 425 V 40 W 425 ft2 40 W 425 itz 40 W 600 tt2

56 W 600 ft2 56 W 600 ft2 56 W 1WO It' 93 m' 1000 It' 93 m'

1774

1771

1776

1775

1771

1776

33 m2 350 It'

33 m' 500 It2 47 m' 500 It' 47 m' 500 Itz 47 m' 800 It' 74 m' 800 It' 74 m'

1778

1777

1781

1779

1777

1781

1780

1777

1781

1783

1782

1785

1784

1782

1785

Ordn

Tnok

142 154 142 154 142 154 142 154 1510 1535 1510 1535 1510 1535 516 758 516 758

B'Mu

278

Flat

278

MM or ~ l m m r *~ n ~a k~ll l t l 1%41 mm

M" 12 mm

Round

Vlr"

278

Flat

11 mm 1W 41 mm

M" 12 mm M" 12 mm

278

Flat

2" 51 mm

12 mm

1538

Round

11 mm

M" 12 mm M" 12 mm

7/38''

1538

Flat

1%41 mm

1538

Flat

2" 51 mm

1788

Flat

2" 51 mm

1786 Flat *Wider batlem require tapering

2H"

64 mm

12 mm h" 16 mm

W 16 mm

m barren filling on l781 car

Small boat batten end car wlaluminum Midi Battslide Small boat battm end car wlaluminum Maxi Battslide

2%" 11 oz 73 mm 312 g z7/< 12 oz 73 mm 340 g

1776

Small boat lull car

1777

Mid-range headboard coupler wlcan

236" 7 oz 60mm 1989 BJ/d 32 oz 222 mm 907 g

1778

Mid-range battm end car wlround batten Battslide

3'1s" 15 oz 89 mm 425 g

1774 1775

142 154 142 154

450 lbs 204 kg 450 lbs 204 kg

1781

Mid-range l i f l car

1782

Big boat headboard coupler wlcan

142 154 1510 1535

325 lbs 147kg 2500 lbs 1134kg

1783

Big boat batten end car 4'1~" wlaluminum Maxi Battsllde 114 mm Big boat batten end car 48" wlaluminm Mega Battslide 114 mm

21 oz 595 g 22 oz 624 g

1510 1535

850 lbs 386 kg

1785

Big boat lull car

11 oz

1784

2'1s'' 8 01 73 mm 227 g 103/d 4001 273 mm 1.13 kg

33K

95 mm 312 g

1510 1535 516 758

625 Ibs 283 kg 4200 Ibs 1905 kg

516 758

1350 Ibs 612 kg

516 758

1350 lbs 612 kg

516 758

1050 lbs 476 kg

Horironlal Bend - In a horizontal bend, the track stays flat and the ends curve to the bow or stern of the boat. Horizontal bends allow the traveler to follow the radius of the boom as it swings across the boat. but are sometimes used for boom vangs and occasionally for staysails, especially those with booms.

...-

Venrcal #end - Ends Up Tnev oenus are "eq.ent, L ~ P Olor claysa IE T i t lracn is bent to aiadius equal to the LP of the sail olus the d~stancefrom the blew to the track The track 1s qenerally mounted on rlsers and angled forward 45" to face the clew of the sail.

VerficaI Bend- Ends Down - Ths IS the most common bend. It is usually used for mansheet traveers mounted over the cabin house. The curve matches the crown of the cabin house for esthetic reasons and allows the track to clear the companionway hatch while minimizing the height of the track risers.

Verlicalflend - Ends Up - Some racing boats use a vertical bend with the ends up to relieve leech tensoning which occurs when the traveler car is moved off of the centerline. Ths phenomenon is exacerbated when part of the mainsheet tackle is placed off of the traveler car on the centerline of the boat as is often the case with ftne tuneigross trim systems.

Compound Bend - Compouro oenor are a comu ra. or1 21 d .m cal ,!no .I io'?nr'a ~ i f Al common ckan,ple v10.c oc nnen a ttacr, s c, veo $1to? horizontal plane to follow the radius of the boom and is mounted to a deck which hasa slight vertical crown

CURVED TRACK Traveler track is often bent t o follow the curve of the cabin house or the radius of the boom. Occasionallv, tracks are bent verticallv with the ends up to relieve tensioning o f i h e leech as the traveler &r is moved off of the centerline of the boat. Very shallow curves in low profile tracks can often be bent during installation, but if necessarv Harken will orebend traveler track to your specif/cations at a modest additionai charge. Horizontal, vertical or compound bends can be made. Bends cannot be extended completely t o the track end, but typically leave 2 t o 5" (50 to 125 mm) unbent at each end depending on the type of track. Harken traveler cars must be matched to the radius of your track. The load carrying ability of a car is diminished in relation to the severity of the bend. Consult the charts on the traveler car pages for the minimum radius a car will ride on. When your loads demand a lonq car and track needs to be bent in a tiqht radius. vou mav need t o use two short cars joined by a coupler. Harken mini maxi and maxi traveler cars cannot ride on vertical bends with a radius under 80 feet ('24.2 m). Ordering lnfurmation - To order curved traveler track, please specify the following information: 1. Part number of track 2. Length of track or length of chord 3. Direction of bend: Horizontal Vertical, ends down Vertical, ends uo C Compo.r~unortzbn~dldno \ e n cal ~o C Compo.nu nor~zontdlan0 ben cal ooun 4. Chord denth or radius of bend Comm . n ~ c a ~1111 e I ilormrlt .,I. tdrrf.. y to ddrneti or !U-r harmen oea er 10 ns.rr i n s y0.r rracd 18 'lent correclly To oeterrn ne toe pr ce of a bend, see chart for part numbers. 100

Radus

r TChord Length

M- Track

length of 6' (2 44 m) or greater or chord depth 01

iJIB REEFING & FURLING I

FURLING FEATURES H a k e n Jib Reefing and Furling Systems are the ultimate headsail handling systems. They incorporate innovative design features, quality materials, and state-of-the-art manufacturing techniques that no other units can match. These are the ingredients which have led builders and owners of fine yachts like the Island Packet 38 shown on page 101 to prefer Harken to any other furling system. These are also the ingredients which have led trans-Atlantic racer Steve Black to choose Harken. Listen to Steve describe the finish of the 1988 Carlsberg Singlehanded Trans-Atlantic Race (CSTAR): "With 300 miles to go it began to blow and clouds raced across the sky. The race was nearly over and I set my sights on Newport at dawn. The day was fading as "Eagle Premier" crossed Nantucket Shoals into the storm. By Force 8 1 had reefed three times and furled the genoa to 200 square feet. I played the furling line 8 to 10 times an hour to maintain a safe 15 knots pounding through the confused shoal waters. At 7:03 AM I crossed the finish line in sight of family and friends. I pulled the furling line one last time and headed in for hot food and a dry bed. "I chose my Harken furling system because I needed a unit that was strong, light and aerodynamic. I couldn't accept less than absolute reliability for singlehanded passages. 10,000 miles later I knew I had made the right choice." Chances are you probably won't ever sail across the Atlantic singlehanded, but the success of your vacation and the safety of your crew could very well depend on the reliability of your furling system. Compare these features point for point with any other units and you'll see that Harken Jib Reefing and Furling Systems are clearly superior.

Swage, Norseman. Sta-Lok or rod litting may be used with any size Hahen syitem.

Main components are machined fram solid 6061-T6 aluminurn which is Hardkote anodized with Tellon impregnation lor years of service.

Multiple races of Torlon bearings distribute load to all balls.

Prooerlv desioned lurlirm turnbuckle ilowieasy heaistay adlustment whlle prwentlng fat~guefa~lurecaused by s~de load~ng

buckle body Insures gall proof operation

)

Easy RIEhg Conmion The h nged H a ~ e feeder n 1s easlly removed W tn 1JSt two screws. wh ch permlts tne ha yard sw~velto pass Remove a few more screws and the d r ~ msl~psoff the stay An optlona spl~tdrJm allows you to remove the arum W I ~ ~ O Lremovlno I the neadstav clev~sD n n eltner case yoJre eft witn a clean aerdynamic ~ O J D I 511 ~ groove foil wn ch is reaav for wick sail chanaes. Sails are now tacned at tne deck so you dan usk your full-hois? racing genoas,

minimal maintenance.

Our scientific testino- .orooram nas res-ltea in an except~aoa~ y free-r.nn ng swre des~gn

E w Lmglll A d / u s t ~ The built-in furling tumbuckle makes installation easy. It is designed to handle the high side loads of a furling system while it corrects for minor measurement errors and makes mast rake adjustment possible

Feeders are carefully shaped and finished to allow quick single handed hoisting and efficient racing sail changes.

E~SVSal1 C h p S ad &ping Reefing is great but there are times when you may want to change sails. Each Harken unit has a builtin Drefeeder and a suoerblv designed leeaer wh,ch make sail chanaes a snao. Ana VOL raise ana loweisails using youiown halyard so you can change sail shape through halyard tension. Order optional snap shackles to speed sail changes.

Easy to A m b l e Designed for owner installation with only simple hand tools. The picture-book instructions make assembly a snap.

Uses Exisling Headstay The aft facing double-grooved foils ride over your existing headstay. The headstay handles the load which maintains the structural integrity of your rig. Reuse your wire or rod headstay and save the expense of a new stay. Ada~tablelo SW#@, Rod. NOMM Or Sh-Lok MIiw Th S versatll~tymeans y o can ~ choose lne type 61 rgglng ana term nals you prefer For eas est nsra allon use swage f ltlngs (our extra-long swage l~ttlngallows you to reLse yoLr neadstay) If you refer a rod headstav an adaoter nlt IS rea~lredNorseman or Sta-106 fittings, preferred intropical waters, are another option. Su@ BoeIiing. Not Just Furling O J OptIona ~ tack swlvel allows me center of the sal1 to 1x1 Delore tne lac6 knlcn reoLces draft ana g ves oetter snape. Use yoJr exlst ng sai S, sDec a v des aned reef na sails or sa s W tn foam shaoina . devices with ihis opiion. Strono foil sections with secure. positiveconnection, prevent twisting when reefing and insure joints will not break down even after years of service. A unique drum lock allows you to reef, secure the drum and not have to worry about accidental sail release in strong winds. Use this feature when moored for extra peace-of-mind when you're away from the boat.

C h Aerodynamic hI/s Our aerodvnamicallv-correct foils won't offend vour sense of aesthetlcior spo ihe alr Iow on yodr genoa i n e lolls are eng neered t b~I6 for SJper or strengtn W t h o ~ ollenslve Frw Rolli~g.Low M ~ i n h n mBsrrings Torlon plastic bal bearings in patent pena~ngstacded races dlsrr bJle the radlal ana thnst oads even y, a owing ihe system to rotate wltn except~onalease Tnese are me same Torlon bearlngs we Jse In oJr f a m o ~ sblg Doat oloc6s an0 they're so re aole that tney re covered oy oLr flve year l~m~teo warranty Ma ntaln ~heseDear nas oy r.nslnq occasionally with freshwatei Finssl Mawhls am/Conrt&'m All of oJr load oear ng components. nc uding tne drum are machlneo, spun or extr~dedof 6061-T6 al~minum.stlicon bronze or sta nless steel for years of re1 aole service Casr~ngsare f o ~ n don y n non-load oearina oans with intrcate sha~eslike the feeaer assemb v or where l are rlardkote loads are m n,mal All atumln~ms t n c t ~ r acomponents anod zed w ~ t hTellon lmpregnatlon for true corrosion protection Wnridwi~Swvi6e Harken's network of distributors and service facilities means that no matter where you cruise expert service and parts will be available.

H a k e n Jib Reefing and Furling Systems are offered in seven sizes. There is also a racing model available in each of the versions in all seven sizes. Most units can be used with swage, rod, Norseman or Sta-Lok terminals. The perfect unit for your boat is easy to determine: First, determine the size of the unit you need for your headstay diameter and boat length. Then, read the description of Series A, B or C below and determine which is best suited to your boat. Next, decide whether you want a split drum to make conversion to racing mode easier. Then, choose between units for wire or rod headstays. Finally, choose which terminal style you prefer - swage. Sta-Lok or Norseman.

Unit 0 Series A

Unit 2 Series B

Unit 3 Series C

Ssrlrr A The Series A unit is the lowest cost unit available. It does not have an independent tack or head swivel. Series A is recommended for use with a foam luff pad for shaping when reefing or if you plan to furl only and not reef. Ordsring inhunmUm Order a Series A unit by adding the letter " A to the part number. For example a 950A would be a Unit 3 without independent tack or head swivels.

SM~MB Series B units include an independent tack swivel. Use a Series B unit if you plan to reef and plan to use your existing sails or a new sail which is not designed with a foam shaping pad. The independent tack swivel allows the center of the sail to roll before the tack to reduce sail draft. The independent swivel also makes the first few turns of furling easier as the heavily reinforced tack patch does not roll until the stay is already rotating. Sails with foam pads mly be used on Series B units. Ordwlng 1R.lOlllwllon Order a Series B unit by adding the letter "8"to the part number. For example a 9008 would be a Unit 0 with an independent tack swivel.

SIYIM C Series C units include independent tack and head swivels. Series C will work well with any type of sail, conventional, foam pad or Aeroluff*. Aeroluff* sails require the use of a Series C Unit and some conventional sails are specially cut to take advantage of the independent head swivel. Ordwlng InfOWon - Order a Series C unit by adding the letter " C to the pan number. For example an 800C would be a Unit 1 with independent tack and head swivel.

'Tne Aelol~H"sa,reetlng system an0 a lemaure systems are patent pen0 ng an0 the lraoemark of honh Sailing Systems

T h e controlling dimension for sizing Harken Jib Reefing and Furling Systems is the headstay wire diameter. There is no discretion in the unit you use. You also need to know your approximate headstay length Wiro S i n (Ix 19 Slrinlw Slall Unit

Yu". %S".

"./l

4mm5mm

Rod Sla -4 (4.37 mm) -6 (5.03 mm) -8 (5.72 mm) -10 (6.35 mm)

Unil 1

'K, 6 mm, 7 mm

Unit 1.5 Unil 2

8 mm 5!t<, W 8 mm. 10 mm

-12 (7.14 mm) -17 (8.38 mm)

Unit 2.5

-22 (9.53 mm)

S!,#''

-12 (7.14 mm)

-22 (9.53 mm) IJnit3 11 mm, 12 mm -30 ( l l1 mm) W , l// -40 (12.7 mm) Unit 14 mm. 16 mm. 20 mm -48 114.27 mm) -60 (16.76 mm) l!,<, lie"

Swap Fittings W Sla-Lok or Norsemn Tormilldls All sizes of Harken Jib Reefing and Furling Systems can be used with either swage fittings or with Sta-Lok or Norseman teninals. Standard units come with swage fittings which must be installed by a rigger using specialized equip'-%. ment. If you use a swage fitting your dealer or disi;i ti with a wire tributor can which provideisyou cut to

174 h

to determine whether a standard package contains enough foils to build your unit. If not, you will need to order extra foils and connectors. Clwia Pin Oiamn8r

Maxlmum Langlh

Standard R c k l p 8 M u Allowable 36'6" 11.73 mm 45'8" 13.92 m 45'8" 13.92 m 60'5 18.42 m 60'5" 18.42 m 74'7' 22.73 m 89'8' 27.33 m

45'6" 13.9 m 52'8" 16.05 m 52'8" 16.05 m 675" 20.55 m 6T5 20.55 m 81'T 24.87 m 101'8" 30.99 m

s/le",

'1~"

12.7 mm Ya" 16 mm Ye''

16 mm

aK,

7 ,

19 mm. 22 mm 1", 1'!8", l'!," 25 mm, 29 mm, mm

107 108 109 110 111 112-113

Rasing Option All Harken units can easily be converted to racing but each of the sizes, in each of the series, can also be obtained with a split drum and basket to simplify conversion to racing. Without this option, conversion to racing requires removing the headstay clevis pin. With the split drum, conversion to racing is done with the headstay connected using only a screwdriver. To order a split d ~ m simply , add an "R" to the pari number you want. Far example, 800BR is a Unit 1 with an um.

Furling Lead Block Kits Furling lead block kits are available. Kits include ball bearing blocks, Hexaratchets to provide proper drag on furling lines, stanchion mount bases, and cleats. Use a 266 lead block kit with Units 0, l, and 1.5.Use a 267 lead block kit with Units 2 and 2.5.

Rod HePdStrqS All sizes of Harken Jib Reefing and Furling Systems may be used with rod headstays. Rod headstays must use a special adapter fitting and must be cut and reheaded by an authorized rod service center.

,,*.

106

$K ,l8,,

19 mm: 22 mm

length and swaged on both ends - ready to install. Some people prefer Sta-Lok or Norseman terminals. They can be installed without specialized equipment - all you need is a wire cutter, pliers and wrench. They are, therefore, popular with people in remote areas who do not have access to swaging machines. Norseman and Sta-Lok terminals are also considered by many people to be superior to swage fittings in tropical saltwater as they are felt to be less susceptible to stress corrosion. In some cases the use of a Sta-Lok or Norseman terminal with an existing headstay wire will result in a headstay which is slightly short and requires the use of an additional toggle. Sta-Lok and Norseman fittings also make removal of the halyard swivel from the stay difficult, though normal conversion to racing is not affected.

he masthead geometry of some boats dictates that a halyard restrainer be used. Two sizes of halyard restrainers are availS able. Each is a stainless steel '. C. bracket shaoed to fit radiused span Tne harddote anoolzed alum~numsneave 1s arooved for both wire and rope h'glyards and rides on Teflon impregnated epoxy bearings. Halyard restrainers should not be used unless required. Please refer to installation instructions for details.Use a 944 restrainer with Units 0,l , and 1.5. Use a 945 restrainer with Units 2,2.5,and 3.

v,'It&''

8 mm. 10 mm, l 1 mm

PIpo

Str~~hI0n Mwnl Basos

061 stanchion mount bases provide an ideal attachment method for furling line lead blocks. The ball joint socket accepts most small boat swivel blocks, including ratchet blocks. They swivel and pivot to provide fair leads. They fit all standard '/a" and 1" (22 and 25 mm) pulpits and stanchions. See page 36 for further details.

Series A

Connector Foil

Actual Size

UNIT 1 Series C

ran

10.

Dnulplm

900 Unit 0 with swage fitting

909

but no headstay wire Unit 0 with Sta-Lok or Norseman terminal but no headstay wire Unit 0 with new headstay wire cut to length and swaged Unit 0 with your old hsadstay wire cut to length and swaged Unit 0 with rod terminal but m headstay Extra 7' (2.13 m) foil extrusion Extra 6" (152 mm) connector

266

Lead block kit

884

Optional snap shackle

937

Split drum retrofit kit

061

Stanchion mount base

940

lsomat adaptwkit

901 902 S m a l l cruising boats are easily overpowered and need an effective reefing System to allow shortening sail from the safety of the cockpit. Unit 0 is the ideal jib reefing and furling system for boats with headstay wires of 5/=", 3/le", 7/32'1, 4mm, or 5 mm and with -4(4.37mm) or -6 (5.03 mm) rod headstays. Typically these are boats 22 to 28 feet (6.5 to 8.5 m) but headStay Size is the controlling dimension when selecting the proper unit for your boat. Ca~unmrSprcliWim Luff tape X6 (6132" or 5 mm)

Headstay wire 3/~s".7/sl", 4 mm, or 5 mm Rod headstay size -4 (4.37 mm) or -6 (5.03 mm) Clevis pin dia -%S" (8mm). #" (10 mm) or 71~s"(12 mm) Headstay length - standard package: 38'6" (11.73 m) - max allowable: 45'6 (13.9 m) AddiUmI in-lfsn - See pages 102 and 103 for an explanation of Special features. See pages 104 and 105 for an explanation of options. 106

903

938 906

944 Unit 0 halyard restrainer

Lrla

sp~n Drum Opllon Add "R to part number Add 'R to part number Add "R to pan number Add "R" to pan number

Specify A, B or C Specify A, B o r C Specify A,BwC Specify A. B or C Specify Add "R to A.BorC part number Required if headstay lmgth is over 30'6" (11.73m)

Specify wire & clevis pin size Specify wire & clevis pin size Specify wire & clevis pin size Specify clevis pin sue Specify rod & clwis pin size

One required for each extra 906 foil ordered Includes three 166 bullet blocks, one 019 little Hexaratchet, four 061 bases, and one cleat For head or tack - order two if snap shackle required at both head and tack For retrofitting existing units Anaches 166, 168, 023.001, or 019 to pulpit or stanchion For use on lsomat span. Includes stemball fining and toggle. For use only when required - See instruction manual. A

Actual Size

U n i t 1 is an extremely popular jib reefing and furling system for moderately sized cruising boats. It is also often used on staysails of larger boats. Unit 1 fits boats with headstay wires of 'h". 6 mm, or 7 mm and with -8 (5.72 mm) or -10 (6.35 mm) rod headstays. Typically these are boats 28 to 36 feet (8.3 to 11 m) but headstay size is the controlling dimension when selecting the proper unit for your boat.

Common SpsEiIiCdtiom Luff tape - X6 ( 6 1 ~ " or 5 mm) Headstay wire '/4", 9/32", 6 mm, or 7 mm Rod headstay size - -8 (5.72 mm) or -10 (6.35 mm) Clevis pin dia - '12" (12.5 mm) Headstay length - standard package: 45'8" (13.92 m) - max allowable: 52'8" (16.05 m) Addllonal Iinomtim - See pages 102 and 103 for an explanation of special features. See pages 104 and 105 for an explanation of options.

061

Stanchion mount base

Attaches 166. 168, 023.001. or 019 to pulpit or stanchion

941

lsomat adapter kit

For use on lsomat spars. Includes stemball fitting and toggle.

944

Unit 1 halyard restrainer

For use only when required

- See instruction manual.

UNlT 1.5 Series B

Connector

Foil

Actual Size

UNlT 2 Series B

U n i t 1.5fillsanichebetween Unit 1 and Unit 2. I t utilizes the Unit 2 turnbuckle components to have the strenath to fit 5/ts" or 8 mm wire headstays and-12 (7.14 mm) rod headstays, but uses the dNm, foils and swivels of Unit 1. It is designed for boats under 36 feet ( l 1 m) in length which have a 5/is" or 8 mm wire headstay or a -12 (7.14 mm) rod headstay. Maximum headstay length with Unit 1.5 is 52'8" (16.05 m). Unit 1.S should not be used on larger boats or with longer headstays. When used with wire headstays, Unit 1.5 will accept only Norseman or Sta-Lok terminals. For conversion to racing the optional split dNm is required. Unit 1.5 is only available in Series B or C.

connlm &$?acmfM

Luff tape - #6 (6152" or 5 mm) Headstay wire - %E"or 8 mm Rod headstay size - -12 (7.14 mm) Clevis pin dia - W (16 mm) Headstay length - standard package: 45'8" (13.92 m) max allowable: 52'8" (16.05 m) ArWHloml l~rm8fion- See Daoes 102 and 103 for an explanation of specla iedi~res.See pages 104 and 105 for an explanation ot opt ons

985

Unit 1.5 with Sta-Lok or Norseman t m i n a l but no headstay wire

Add B or C to part number

Add 'R" to pan number

Specify wire size

986

Unit 1.5 with rod terminal but no headstay

Add B o r C to pan number

Add 'R' to pan number

Specify rod size

807

Dnra'l' (2.13 m) foil extrusim

Required if headstay length is over 45'8' (13.92 m)

810

Extra 7' (178 mm) connector

One rquired for each extra 807 foil ordered

267

Lead block kit

Includes three 166 bullet blocks, one 019 little Hexaratchet, four 061 bases, and one cleat

884

Optional snap shackle

886

Split drum retrofit kit

For head or tack order two if snap shackle required at both head and tack For retrofitting existing units

061

Stanchion mount base

942

Isamat adapter kit

944

Unit 1.5 halyard restrainer

Attaches 166, 168. 023. 001. or 019 to pulpit or stanchion For use on lsomat spars. Includes stemball fitting and toggle For use only when required - see instruction manual

Connector

Foil

Actual Size

Part NO.

Unlt,2 1.s a .jib .reef~ng . and furling system designed for larger cruising boats. Unit 2 fits boats with headstay wires of 5/is", Ya", 8 mm, or 10 mm and -12 (7.14 mm) or -17 (8.38 mm) rod headstays. Typically these are boats 35 to 46 feet (10.6 to 14.2 m) but headstay size is the controlling dimension when selecting the proper unit for your boat.

Com~mnSpsc1,iurons Luff tape - #6 (6/52" or 5 mm) Headstay wire - %E", W, 8 mm, or 10 mm Rod headstay size - -12 (7.14 mm) or -17 (8.38 mm) Clevis pin dia - 1/8" (16 mm) Headstay length - standard package: 60'5" (18.42 m) - allowable: 67'5" (20.55 m) Addllonal Infomthn - See pages 102 and 103 for an explanation of special features. See pages 104 and 105 for an explanation of options.

split Ostcrlprion

%tlu

Drum option

835

Unit 2 with swage fitting but no headstay wire

Add A. B or C to part number

Add "R" to p m number

Specify wire size

836

Unit 2 with Sta-Lak or Norseman terminal but no headstay wire

Add A, B or C to pan number

Add "R' to pan number

Specify wire size

837

Unit 2 with rod terminal but no headstay

Add A, B or C to pan number

Add "R' to part number

Specify rod size

836

Unit 2 with new headstay wire cut to length and swaged Unit 2 with vour old headstav u re c , ~to kngtn ana swag&

Add A, B or C to part number Add A. B or C 10 pan n ~ m o e ~ Rea. re0 i neaostav

Add "R' to part number Add "R" to p m nurnoer enatn is

Specify wire size

839 842

E ~ l r a7' . 2 I 3 rnl loll

885

Optional snap shackle

887

Split drum retrofit kit

061

Stanchion mount base

942

lsomat adapter kit

945

Unit 2 halyard restrainer

Soecifv wire size .

For head or tack shackle required at t For retrofitting existi Attaches 168, 023. 001. or 019 to pulpit or stanchion For use on lsomat spars, Includes stemball fitting and toggle. For use only when required - See instruction manual.

UNlT 2.5 Series C

W , ,c 19 mm. 22 mm

UNlT 3 Series C

U n i t 2.5fillsanichebetween unit 2 and unit 3. It utilizes the Unit 3 turnbuckle components to

have the strength to fit -22 (9.53 mm) rod headstays, but uses the drum, foils and swivels of Unit 2. I t is designed for boats under 46 feet (14.2 m) in length which have a -22 (9.53 mm) rod headstay. Maximum headstay length with Unit 2.5 is 6 7 ' 5 (20.55 m). Unit 2.5 should not be used on larger boats or with longer headstays. For conversion to racing the optional split drum is required. Unit 2.5 is only available in Series B or C. CLUumml SgssIi~lli0~1

Luff tape - %6 (61s" or 5 mm) Rod headstay size - -22 (9.53 mm) Clevis pin dia - %" (19 mm), '10" (22 mm) Headstay length standard package: 60'5 (18.42 m) - allowable: 6 7 ' 5 (20.55 m) Addilionl IlnfmIim - See pages 102 and 103 for an explanation of special features. See pages 104 and 105 for an explanation of options. 110

Rrt NO.

D#UllpliOn

Splil D R ~

QfiD

Oflirn

990

Unit 2.5 with rod teninal but no headstay

842

844

Extra 7 (2.13 m) foil extmslon Extra 9 (229 mm) wnnector

264

Lead black kit

885

Optional snap shackle

887

Split dwm retrofit kit

For retrofitting existing units

061

Stanchion mount base

Attaches 164. 023, W1, or 019 to pulpit or stanchion

943

lsomat adapter kit

945

Unit 2.5 halyard restrainer

For use on lsomat span. Includes stemball litting and toggle. For use only when required See instruction manual

Add B or C to part numbw

Add "R" to pall number

Specify rod size

Required if headstay length is over 60'5 (18.42 m) One required lor each extra 842 foil ordered Includes three 168 bullet blocks, one 019 little Hexaratchet, four 061 bases, and one cleat order two if snap For head ar tack shackle required at both head and fa*

Connector

Foil

Actual Size

Unit-3 is. a jib. reefing . and furling system .

designed for very large cruising boats. Unit 3 fits boats with headstay wires of %6", llz", l l mm, or 12 mm and -22 (9.53mm) or -30 (11 .l mm) rod headstays. Typically these are boats 45 to 72 feet (13.7to 21.9 m) but headstay size is the controlling dimension when selecting the proper unit for your boat. Commn Spesi/ipdIiarlions Luff tape - #6 (6/32"or 5 mm) Headstay wire - 7/26", H", 1 1 mm, or 12 mm Rod headstay size - -22(9.53mm) or -30 (11.l mm) Clevis pin dia - 3/I" or 78" (19 or 22 mm) Headstay length - standard package: 74'7" (22.73m) - allowable: 81'7" (24.87m) Addilionsl InfOlllMtiOri - See pages 102 and 103 for an explanation of special features. See pages 104 and 105 for an explanation of options.

950

Unit 3 with swage fittinq but no headstaywire -

Add A. B or C to part number

Add " R to pan number

S~ecifvwire & cievis pin size

951

Unit 3 with Sta-Lok or Norseman terminal but no headstay wire

Add A, B or C to part number

Add "R" to pan number

Add A. B or C to pan number Add A. B or C to pan numoer

Add " R to pan number Add "R" to pan n-moer

Specify wlre & clevis pin size Soecifv rod & cievis bin siie S~ecifvwire & c eves p n.. S ze - ....

AOO A. B or C to pan number

pan numbw

Unit 3 with rod terminal but no headstay 953 Unit 3 with new headstav wire ct. to lengtn an0 r r a g e j 9 c n 1 3 rr tn vo.r o a neaosta, wire cut to lkngth and swagid 952

958

Extra 7 (2.13 m) foil extrusion

chvis bin sue

Required if headstay length is ovw 7 4 ' 7 (22.73 m)

960 Extra 1 0 (254 mm) connector

One required for each extra 958 foil ordered

969

Lead block kit

968

Split drum retrofit kit

Includes one 011. three 001. one 009. and one cleat For retrofitting existing units

061

Stanchion mount base

Attaches 001 or 009 to pulpit or stanchion

943

lsomat adapter kit

For use on lsomat span. Includes stemball fitting and toggle.

945

Unit 3 halyard restrainer

For use only when required - See instruction manual

Un ~4,t 1s .a 11b.reef~ng . and furling system for the largest cruising boats. Unit 4 fits boats with headstay wires of 9/16", ?a", =h'', 14 mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, and for -40(12.7mm), -48(14.27mm) or-60(16.76mm) rod headstays. Typically these are boats 60 to 90 feet (18.3 to 27 m) but headstay size is the controlling dimension when selecting the proper unit for your boat. Unit 4 is a limited production item. Allow up to 6 weeks for delively.

connon Spu'IhIiGWs

Luff tape - X7 ('/a" or 6 mm) Headstay ~ire-~/16",W.%",14mm, 16mm,or20mm Rod headstay size -40 (12.7 mm), -48 (14.27 mm). or -60 (16.76 mm) 1%". 11/1" (25.4 mm, 28.6 mm, Clevis pin dia l", or 31.8 mm) Headstay length -standard package: 89'8" (27.33 m) max allowable: 101'8" (30.99 m) Additionrl ll~Wmfio11- See pages 102 and 103 for an explanation of special features. See pages 104 and 105 for an explanation of options.

1000 Unit 4 wim swaw litting

but no headstay wire l001 Unit 4 with Sta-Lok or Norseman terminal but no headstay wire 1002 Unit 4 with rad terminal but no headstay 1003 Extra 12' (3.66 m) foil extrusion 1W5 Extra 13H" (343 mm) connector

Only available Add 'R' to as Series C part number Only available Add 'R' to as M e s C part number Only available Add 'R' to as M e s C pan number Required if headstay length is over 89'8" (27.33 m) One required for each extra 1003 foil d.u.d. ... o. .r.

1009 Split drum retrofit kit

For retrofining existing units

Specify wire (L clwis pin size Specify wire (L clwis pin size Specify rad (L clevis pin size

Halyard Shnkle

-- Head

Shackle Feeder hlrsnce

Actual Size

. ... .. ...

1,. l,*", 1,r 25 4 mm. 28.6 mm. 31.8 mm

Harken small boat furling systems are designed to allow the dinghy or trailerable cruising sailor the ability to furl the jib from the cockpit. Both the drums and halyard swivels of these furling systems feature multiple stacked races of Delrin or Torlon bearings to insure smooth rotation under load. Smaller dinghys use the 162 and 163 units with Delrin bearings while larger dinghys use the 164 and 165 which feature hi-load Torlon bearings. Trailerables and other small cruising boats use the 207 and 208. The 207 swivel is supplied with a removable retainer to hold the swivel near the headstay when in use. All small boat furling systems require a jib with a luff wire properly seized to the sail. The luff wire caries most of the headstay load in use and must be properly sized for the boat. Some boats, particularly dinghys remove the headstay entirely while others, including most small cruising boats keep the headstay to support the mast when the sail is not hoisted. Small boat jib furling gear does not allow a sail to be used efficiently in a reefed configuration but does allow the jib to be set and doused from the cockpit. hn NI.

162

163

Ohm Ducrlfllo' Upper swivel Furling drum

2%" 64 mm

28" 64 mm

164

165 199

207 208

Hi-load uppe: swivel Hi-load lurling drum Tack extension

2'h" 64 mm

2%"

01111)l OWdn OR. 1" 25 mm 2%" 70 mm

Mulmm

LIUl %l20

3 mm

%l="1' 10" 4 mm 8 mm

'h" 3 mm

4 8 az

6 mm

128 g 8 01 227 g

%o"

8 mm 3/70''

'18"

64 mm

2%" 70 mm

13W 364 mm

96" 16 mm

'Ire"

8 mm

6 mm

l%$ 37 mm

10 mm

5 mm

W l 0 mm

%I"

Ki'

5 mn

B mm

Cruising upper 4" 102 mm swivel Cruising furling 4" drum l 0 2 mm

4211a"

17ltE

126mm

37mm

2% oz 64 g 4'lr oz 128 g 2% oz 64 g

8 mm

I,$

4 mm

l" 25 mm 1" 25 mm

,K 3 mm %" 3 mm

'Id 6 mm K 6 mm V 6 mm

%o"

8 mm 1" 25 mm

Cllvls PIU wnlr O1lmmr

Wldlh

I*"

6mm

%i' YI<

B mm

6m 170 g 14% 02 411 g

Mdmm WO~IV Lold 500 Ibs Useon dinghys 227 kg under16 ft. (4.9 m) 500 lbs Use w1162 227 kg 950 lbs Use an dinghys to 20 ft. (6.1 m); 431 kg catamarans to 18 8.(5.5 m) 950 lbs Use ~ 1 1 6 4 431 kg Allows mounting of drum below deck 20W lbs 907 kg 2000 Ibs 907 kg

Use on cruising h a t s to 25 8.(7.6 m): catamarans to 23 8.(7 m) Use w1207

3 LAZY JACKS 1 L a z y jacks are simple devices for controlling mainsails during reefing and furling. The sail drops between the lazy jacks when lowered and is contained on the boom where it can be easily secured. Lazy jacks work exceptionally well with full batten mainsails, but may also be used with conventional mainsails. Lazy jacks are adjustable and are often used as auxiliary boom topping litts, especially on boats with solid vangs. Our lazy jack kits provide everything you need for a simple lazy jack system. They include pre-swaged wires, blocks, eyestraps, line, a cleat and fasteners. Clear, easy to follow pictorial instructions include instructions for altering sail covers for use with lazy jacks. The 252 and 253 use a two leg system while the 254 has three legs to better contain sails on longer booms.

S p I a I F~Iurus Pre-swaged vinyl coated stainless cable Ball bearing blocks Complete pictorial instructions

252

Small lwy rack kit

21' 28' 6.4 m - 8.5 m

8' - 10'6" 2.44 m - 3.2 m

253

Medium l b y jack kit

27' - 37' 8.2 m 11.3 m

10'6 - 14' 3.2 - 4.27 m

254

Large lazy jack kit

35' - 42' 10.7 m - 12.8 m

12'- 16' 3.7 m - 4.9 m

115

Imagine reefing your mainsail by standing in the cockpit and pulling just one line. In seconds you're reefed, trimmed and sailing again. Harken single line reefing kits offer everything you need to install Garry Hoyt's patented system which has been used successfully on hundreds of boats. Boom end blocks are track-mounted so that installation is extremely easy and block positioning may be changed as sails stretch or new sails are purchased. Gooseneck blocks are also trackmounted to place the reefing blocks in the best position for proper sail shape. Kits include tracks, blocks, fasteners, and simple pictorial instructions, including instructions to sailmakers for modifying your existing sail. You need to furnish rope and a cleat or stopper to match those on your boat. SpdaI Nsluns Ball bearing blocks Adjustable track mounted blocks Simple pictorial instructions

NO.

250 251

OacrifllO"

BW W

M81d1 A r *

Small single line reefing kit Large single line r e e f i ~kit

6.7 m - 8.2 m 28' - 38'

22'-27'

Under 150 1t2 Unda 14 m2 150 - 300 1i2 14-26M

6.5m-11.6m

Rob McCreaoy Phom

3 HARKEN WINCHES 1

Drums are removable for service by removing only one screw.

Patented ball bearing roller protects sheets against wear and redu friction.

Self-tailing arm is adjustable to 22 positions after the winch is mounted.

All winches (from the 42) leatwe a stainless steel handle sacket for maximum durability.

l l

17-4 PH stainless steel roller bearings ride in all metal cages. Metal cages are stiffer, preventing efficiency robbing distonion and allow more bearings for the same diameter, decreasing the load carried by each bearing. Less load per bearing means greater elficiency. Large diameter spindles form a large bearing sunlace to properly carw the load.

Pawls are held captive by the springs. They are easy to remove but won't drop out accidently during service.

- Gei ,on winches from the 42 feature four pawls for maximum reliability and to minimize backlash.

every gear. All bases feature large drain holes. whches as s ~ ~ I I > ; the 32 are Z,!~~',"~IZ,~~~T~~

Larger winches use two gears to drive drums. This reduces the oao on the drum gear an0 loam me atJm symmelr r a ly whlcn improves elliciency.

For years when sailors needed innovative solutions to problems they turned to Harken for small and big boat hardware. Now. big boat sailors with special needs turn to Harken for innovative solutions to winch problems. Encore, a Sparkman & Stephens 73 built by Derecktor's, is an IMS racer which will be cruised extensively by the owner. The racing need is for reliable, efficient, lightweight winches while the cruising need is for electric winches to allow this boat to be sailed short-handed. The solution was Harken racing winches with electric drives for cruising. Harken Redline winches are the finest winches built. They set a new standard in design, engineering, manufacturing techniques, materials and quality control. Feature for feature no other winches compare. Harken winches are extremely efficient because they utilize larger bearings, feature bearings on most gears and drive shafts, and are built to very fine tolerances. Efficient winches allow the crew to conserve energy and to trim more effectively. Redline winches are reliable because they use only the best materials and design for each application. You may not need to combine the features of lightweight racing winches with electric drives but you, too, will appreciate the benefits of efficient, reliable winches. They make your boat faster, safer and easier to sail. 118

fit! -

Winsh HandIbs Harken winch handles are a unique blend of good looks and smooth efficiency, the perfect complement to Redline winches and a positive addition to any winch. All seven winch handles feature ball bearing grips for more efficient and comfortable operation. Lock-in handles are easily released with a conveniently positioned thumb switch. They are safer to use as they will not slip out of the winch while you are cranking and may be left unattended in a winch.

-C-.

1.-

Sell-Tailing Harken winches feature a self-tailing mechanism of unparalleled efficiency which is extremely gentle to your sheets. The feeder is a patented ball bearing roller which greatly reduces friction, protecting sheets and increasing efficiency. The traditional steel hook feeder is inefficient and damaging to line. Harken's self-tailing device is unique in its ability to adjust to varying line sizes. This ability to adjust to different line diameters has several important advantages: The jaws can be softly textured to protect the sheets. The optimum feed tension can be achieved which reduces line friction further and greatly enhances efficiency. Adjustment is simple. ~hes~ring-loaded upper flange of th4ailing mechanism is depressed and turned to correspond to the sheet diameter.

Three S p d winch63 Harken three speed winches are extremely simple to use. The name plate ring next to the winch handle socket is depressed to engage the three speed mode. Use first gear for fast sheet trimming in light to moderate air, or ignore first gear in very heavy conditions. Coupled with Harken's large drum diameters, three speed Redline winches offer very high line speeds for racing or fast cruising.

Available h Chrome, Alum11~1m or PoIisM Ironze Most standard Redline winches are available with chromed-bronze or hard anodized aluminum drums. All winches offered with chrome drums are available with polished bronze drums by special order. Aluminum is lighter and many people prefer the look of black winches. Chromed bronze winches offer a rich look and great durability. Polished bronze offers a traditional appearance for special boats.

Modulariily Harken's modular system allows you to upgrade the configuration of your winches as your requirements change. Start with an economical two speed winch and later convert to self-tailing or three speed without changing the entire winch. Only Harken offers such complete modularity. Standard two speed winches may be converted to self-tailing (#42 up), three speed (#48 up) or both ($56up). Conversion is simple and requires only the addition of a modular kit. 119

I t is important to match the correct winch to each job on your boat. You need a winch of the correct size and of the correct type for the task at hand. This winch selection guide is designed to simplify choosing the right winch. If you have any questions, or would like further advice, please contact us or any of our distributors. The selection chart is based on a masthead rigged monohull of medium displacement. Fractionally rigged monohulls should refer only to sail area rather than boat length. ULDE's may consider a smaller size winch, while very heavy boats should consider moving to a larger size. Multihulls generally need to move to a larger winch because of their high righting moment and because they sail in higher apparent winds.

Winch Sizing

Powered Winches

In most cases, the part number of a Harken winch directly reflects the power ratio in the lowest gear when using a 1 0 (254 mm) handle. In the case of wide body winches, there is no direct relationship between power ratio and part number. Choose a winch which will give you adequate power for the loads you are likely to experience. The chart shows recommendations for racing and cruising boats. Generally racing boats are sailed harder and require larger winches, but cruising boats destined to be sailed extensively in heavy air or with a limited crew may be advised to favor the same power ratios as are suggested for racing.

Powered winches let vou trim the heaviest loads with just the touch of a button. Harken offers both electric and hydraulic winches. Both are available in a wide range of sizes starting with a 48.2ST to handle sheets and halyards on cruising boats from 35 feet (10.7 m). All Redline powered winches are extremely efficient self-tailers. Many cruising sailors have found that making one primary winch a powered winch offers a wide range of benefits. Sheets can be crossr led to the powered winch in heavy air. Halyards can be led aft when it's necessary to send a man aloft - a real benefit to couples cruising alone. Even a single powered primary winch can transform a cruising boat into a very simple boat to sail shorthanded.

WINCH TYPES Self- Tailing Self-tailing winches allow one crew to crank powerfully with both hands while the winch tails itself. They are very useful on all functions on cruising boats where crew are likely to be limited and are often used for halyards, running backstays and controls on racing boats.

Three Speed Three speed winches are faster because the dNm turns very quickly in the first speed. The bulk of a sheet can be taken in quickly after a tack using this high speed. The trimmer can then shift speeds and take in the balance of the sheet s i n g the two more powerl~lgears. Tnree speed winches are lavorea for sheet winches on racing boats over 35 feet (10.7 m) and are sometimes used on large performance cruising boats.

Modularily Most Harken winches are modular so that you can add self-tailing, three speed, or three speed, self-tailing to a standard two speed winch by the simple addition of a conversion kit. It is always better to purchase the correct winch for your needs, but modularity allows you to convert a winch as your requirements change. For example, you may plan to race a new boat for a couple of seasons before "retiring" to cruise so you would start out with three speed primary winches and later add self-tailing. Please check winch specifications carefully as not all models are totally modular. 120

Drum Material Choose the best dNm material for your sailing. Aluminum is the racers' choice for its lightness and is often preferred by cruisers who like the black anodized appearance. Many cruisers prefer the classic appearance of chromed bronze winches. They are heavier than aluminum but are preferred when wire will be carried on the drum. All models offered in chromed bronze are also available in polished bronze by special order. Some larger winches and some raciniwinches are offered with combination dNmS which have stainless steel sleeves on an aluminum drum.

Racing Winches Harken also offers a full range of ultra light racing winches. These winches are designed for the most demanding racing sailors and feature aluminum bodies. Torlon bearings, alloy stripper arms, and other features of special interest to racing sailors.

iWINCH SELECTION CHART 1 'h Ton LOA-FEET LOA-MEIERS B1 Gma (Sq.F l l q . M) Spimaker (Sq.RI%. M) Maimail (Sq.Ft./Sq. M)

2528 768.5 300128 400137 150114

l Ton 40-41 12-12.5 750170 1400113 300128

Gma Sheet

Racing Cwising

16-32' 16-32

48-53* 4-53?

Racing

16 8

44-46* 42-44

Mainsheet

Racing c~ising

8 6

40*

Geroa

Racing CwisiIQ

16 8

44-46* 42-44

8 8

42-44' 40

42-44*

Halyard

Main HAW

S W l Halyard

Racing msing M W Wing

40 340* 16-32 1632' 16

Spimaka W k r n

w i

Maimail hhUl

CNbi

Rafmg

32 16 32* 1632

a R-

1632* 16

Fractmal

NW I'ghtweimming finches my be &ituted fw standard wioches m W places. Ekh%a h@adic winches may te substituted fw s t M fin& in W applratim.

42' 46-48'

S i n g l e speed winches are used for sheet winches on very small boats and for halyard winches on small and medium sized boats. They are also useful for a variety of control functions on many boats. Harken Redline single speed winches are the finest small winches made. They feature all metal bases and bushings or bearings where other brands use plastic bodies and no bearings. Small two speed winches are useful for primary winches on small and medium sized boats and for halyards on medium sized boats. The 032.2 and 040.2 both have roller bearings on the interior center shaft and 17-4 PH stainless primary gears, features generally found only on competitol's larger winches. The B6 is available only with an aluminum drum, but other winches shown are available with aluminum, chrome or polished bronze dnrms. The first speed on these winches is direct drive. These winches are not modular.

ArWifiomI lnhrmafion- See pages 118 and 119 for an explanation of special features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. OrdtKq I&maflorr - Specify winch drum material by adding A (aluminum), B (polished bronze) or C (chromed bronze) to part number. Polished bronze by special order only. 122

M NO.

60r Rdlo Pmtr Aa50 Owm lus 1 s 2nd IU 2n1 ~ i u n a . rtian*ar

1:l

8.4:l

3%d'

3'1." 82 mm 2%" 4,121. 391~6" 70mm 115mm 90mm 2V1" 4%" 4'1!sU 70 mm 120 mm 112 mm 2'Yli' 5 5'1." 74 mm 136 mm 134 mm 3 5"hs" 5'31~s"

60 mm 90 mm

1:l

7.31

816.2

1:1 2 3 : l 7 2 : l 16:l

832.2

1:l 4 7 : l 68:i 92:l

840.2

1:l 6.1:l 6 7 : l 40:I

W8IgM Hs19M Alunlnun C C O ~cimh 161bs 709 g 2.3lbs lkg 5.5 Ibs 2.5 kg 7.3 Ibs 3.3 kg 8.5 lbs

441bs 1.9kg

2%; 6 x '1." FH 65mm G x 6 m m F H 3slts" 4x5/h"FH 90mm 4 x B m m F H

7 1 Ibs 3Yla" 5 x '1." FH 3.2 kg 90 mm 5 x 6 mm FH 9.4 Ibs 4'V 5 x 'K FH 4.3 kg 105 mm 5 x 6 mm FH 11.9 Ibs 4'1t6" 5 x 'K FH

MODULAR TWO SPEED WINCHES T w o speed winches are widely used for sheets and halyards on boats of all sizes. Harken Redline two speed modular winches offer unprecedented flexibility. These winches can all be converted to selftailing with the simple addition of a modular kit. From the 48.2 up, they can be converted to three speed. From the 56.2 up, they can be converted to both self-tailing and three speed. With only a fraction of the expense of a new winch, a two speed winch can be changed to self-tailing or three speed as your winch requirements change. Part NO.

842.2

6mr Rmlo 2nd

111

25:1 7.31

Pomr Rat10 itt 2nd 14:i

42:l

044.2

2.5:1

8.2:i 138:l

441

846.2

2.53

9.2:1

46:l

13:1

848.2

4:1

10:1

20:l

4k1

853.2

5:i

12:i

22:i

531

Fi$r

6W 162 mm 6%" 172 mm 7%1" 182mm

13.6 Ibs 6.17 kg 14.5 Ibs 6.58 kg 16 Ibs 7.26 kg

17.3 1bs 7.85 kg 18.4 Ibs 8.35 kg 22 lbs 9.98kg

128 mm 5 ' ' 128 mm S'K 140mm

7%; 192 mm

20.6 lbs 9.34 kg 26.3 lbs 1193 kg

26 lbs 11.8 kg 33.5 lbs 15.2 kg

~rmobr

HoluM

3g/d 90 mm 3W 92 mm

6%" 165 mm 6"hs" 170 mm

3>5/16"

6'/<

175mm

4 102 mm 45s" 112 mm

7%" 190 mm 8%~" 220 mm

WaCM ~luminum chrom

Drum Diamm

100mm

All 01 these w~ncheshave sta~nlesssteel roller bearings n afl metal caaes to lmorove elf ciencv From the 48 LD d r ~ m sare sLDDortea bv b i bearings. All center siafts and the on most moduiar two . speed winches ride on roller bearings. Addilionsl Inhrmalion - See pages 118 and 119 for an explanation of ecial features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. rdsring lnlormlion- Specily winch d ~ material m by adding A (aluminurn), B (polished bronze) or C (chromed bronze) to part number. Polished bronze by special order only.

8%~"

218 mm

S'ha"

6'ia" 155 mm 7'hs"

180mm

Moblar

Modular

Fadonon KII S X %a" FH BK42.2ST 5 x 8 mm FH S x %c'' FH BK44.2ST 5 x 8 mm FH S x %d' FH BK46.2ST 5 x 8 m m FH

6 X %B"FH BK48.2ST 6 x 8 m m FH 6 x %s" FH BK53.2ST 6 x 8 m m FH

BK48.3 BK53.3

123

MODULAR TWO SPEED WINCHES Large two speed winches are used for sheets and halyards on offshore boats over 37 feet (11 m). They are totally modular and can be converted to self-tailing, three speed, or self-tailing and three speed. By special order, the 874.2 can be modified to provide power ratios of 85:l or 92:l for use on very large boats. Only Harken Redline winches offer such high power ratios in a modular winch. PM HI.

856.2

P a r I)ltio 211

Irt $1

13:l

P m t r R8lo 2nd

111

21.1

5B:l

864.2

5.7:l 16.5:1 22.5:1 M:l

866.2

7.33

20:l

25:l

BB:I

874.2

731

22:l

25.1

74:l

AWlUnMI i ~ m U o n See pages 118 and 119 for an explanation of s cial features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. &in# l r ~ ~ o-r Soecifv i winch drum material bv addina A (aluminjm), B (polisned bronie) or C (cnromed bronzej to paG number Pol~sheaDronze by spec al order only.

Own OlmWr

Buc Olan8lor

WollM Bunlwm Chnm

4%" 120mm 5%" 130mm 5W 150 mm 5W 150 mm

8e!'" 225 mm 9W 245 mm 10%6" 265 mm

31 lbs 14.1 kg 41.3 Ibs 18.7 kg 53.1 IbS 24.1 kg 54.5 lbs 24.7 kg

9%235mm W 270mm I1'%rm 300 mm l ~ ! " 1lig!<,s" 265 mm 300 mm

40 lbs 18.1 kg 47 lbs 21.3 kg 62.6 Ibs 28.4 kg 64 16s 29 kg

Cld: 7"!$6" 195 mm 8'h" 210 mm 8%" 225 mm 8%" 225 mm

R#OI*n

Mrdubr ST Klt BK56.2ST

6 x %e" FH 6 x 8 m m FH 5 x W FH BK64.2ST 5 x 10 mm FH 6 x W FH BK66.2ST 6 x l 0 mm FH 6 x W FH BK74.2ST 6 x l 0 mm FH

Mobllr 3 Spsd KII 8K56.3

Mdlr BK56.3ST

BK64.3

BK643ST

BK66.3

BK663ST

BK74.3

BK74.3ST

THREE SPEED WINCHES

Harken Redline three speed winches are extremely simple to use. The name plate ring next to the winch handle socket is depressed to engage the three speed mode. Use first gear for fast sheet trimming in light to moderate air, or ignore first gear in heavy conditions. Coupled with Harken's large dNm diameters, three speed Redline winches offer very high line speeds for racing or fast cruising. For maximum efficiency the drums of these winches are supported vertically by ball bearings, the main drive gears are 17-4 PH stainless, and there are roller bearings on the internal center shaft and on the gear pins.

Addilional lnlormation - See pages 118 and 119 for an explanation of special ieaiures. See pages 120 and 121 lor suggested uses. Oldarinn Inlomn'on - Soecilv winch dNm rnalerlai by aodlng A (al~mlnLm)B (pO.lShe0 oronze) or C tcnrornea oronze) to part n~rnber Polished bronze by spec~alorder only

Pnrt No.

6 ~ Ratio 1 Powor Altio Drum Baw 1sl 2md 3rd Irl 2nd 3rd Dinmob Ollnaor

WO!~M

w o w

Alumiwm Chmml Clrclo

3 MODULAR THREE SPEED WIIYCHES

L a r g e three speed winches are used on boats where even the first speed needs a power advantage in order to trim efficiently. First gear is selected by depressing the name plate ring next to the winch handle socket. Use first gear for fast sheet trimming in light to moderate air. or ignore first gear in very heavy conditions. Coupled with Harken's large drum diameters, three speed Redline winches offer very high line speeds for racing or fast cruising. By special order, the 874.3 can be provided with power ratios of 85:l or 92:l for use on high loads such as found on very large boats or multihulls. Only Harken Redline winches offer such high power

13:l

9:l

21.1

56:l

864.3 23:l

5.7:l 165:l

9:l

22.5:l

84:l

866.3 2.8:l

7.3:l

20:l

931

25:l

B0:l

874.3 2.8:l

73:l

22:l

9.3:l

25:l

74:l

856.3 2.2:l

5:l

4%" 120 mm 5'la" 130 mm 5W ' 150 mm 5'Ia"

150 mm

8%" 225 mm 956" 245 mm 10'1ta" 265 mm 10%~'' 265 mm

ratios. These winches may be converted to self-tailing by the addition

of a modular kit. m of these winches For maximum efficiency the vertical d ~ loads are carried by ball bearings, two gears drive the drum, shaft pins are 17-4 PH stainless and all gears ride on roller bearings.

AWilion81 lnlorm~tion- See pages 118 and 119 lor an exp anal on ol

spec~alfeatures See pages 120 ano 121 lor s~ggesteduses Ordering lnlormalion - Speclly w~nchdrum mater al oy add~ngA (a Lmlnum]. B (po shed bronze) or G (chrorned bronze] to part number Pollsnea bronze by spec~alorder only

9'h 235 mm 1O V 270 mm l1%~" 300 mm 11'~lM 300 mm

32.4 ibs 14.7 kg 43.7 ibs 19.8 kg 55.8 Ibs 25.3 kg 56.4 lbs 25.6 kg

40.1 ibs 18.2 kg 53.1 Ibs 24.1 kg 61.3 lbs 27.8 kg 61.9 ibs 28.1 kg

7"lqa" 195mm 8'h 210mm 8'h 225 mm 8%" 225 mm

6 x Yls" FH 6x8mm FH 5 x X" FH 5xlOmmFH 6 x X" FH 6 X 10 mm FH 6 X X" FH 6 X l 0 mm FH

K56.3ST K64.3ST K663ST K743ST

SE1F- TAILING WINCHES S m a l l Harken Redline self-tailing winches are ideal sheet and halyard winches on smaller cruising and racing boats. The self-tailing mechanism means that one crew can quickly and easily trim or raise sails. The one speed B16 is used for sheets on very small boats and for halyards and controls on small and medium sized boats. The handle ratchets in one direction to facilitate cran~ingLnoer neavy loaos. A Redline self-ra no W nches ad usr ro acceor a var etv,of aooropriate line diameters. ~h"ejaws of the B16 adjusi with the s~mple

Part NO.

Isl

6 a r Rdio 2nd

lsl

M m r Rdio 2nd

Orvm Olmwtor

Oiommf

H'igM

BI6.1ST

2.3:l

15:l

4%-

5gltE

Btr,

change of washers in the head of the winch. The 832.2 and 840.2 adjust easily by depressing and turning the spring-loaded top plate. A ball bearing roller on the self-tailing arm protects sheets and reduces friction.

Additions1 Inhrmulion - See pages 118 and 119 for an explanation of soecial features. See oaoes 120 and 121 for suooested uses. Ordefing Inlomlion' ~ p e cwlnch ~ l ~d r ~ mmaiei al oy add ng A (a LmlnJm). B (DO shed bronze] or C (chromed bronze) to pan n.moer Polished bmnzeby special order only. WolgM ~lminum Chromo 7 ibs

8.5 lbs

Fnlonor Clrcla 3sl~i

Lino S i n ML Max 5 x 'k" FH

MODULAR TWO SPEED SE1F-TAILING WINCHES

M o d u l a r two speed self-tailing winches are used for sheets, halyards and control lines on medium to large offshore boats. From the 56.2ST upwards, these winches may be converted to three speed self-tailing winches or to three speed winches with the simple addition of a modular conversion kit. By depressing and turning the spring loaded top plate, the jaws of winches adjust to accept different line diameters. A ball bearing roller on the self-tailing a n protects sheets and reduces friction.

Enr R*k M

1c.i

Imlo

D m Dlnm~kr

h !l-

By special order, the 74.2 is available to provide power ratios of

85:lor 92:l for use on very high loads. Only Harken Redline winches offer such high power ratios in a modular winch.

AddllIml lntarm8flon See pages 118 ano 1 l9 for an explanallon of specla leat~resSee pages 120 and 121 for suggestea Jses Orrhrlq Inlor~~~IIouSpec ly wlnch a r m mater~alay addlng A (alumln~m),B (polished oronze) or C (chromed bronze) to part number Pollsned bronze by spec~alorder only WBIIM Almlnum

Chmm

F*8r

Clrdm

Mmnn

LI* S l D

PIrl

611r Ralin 2nd

MO.

B562ST

5.1

13:1

Drum Olamollr

Dialer

56:l

4% 120mm 5'K 130 mm

87< 225mm 9W 245 mm

5'1s'' 150mm 5'1< 150 mm

21:l

B642ST 5.7:l 16.5:1 22 5:l 64:l B66.2ST 7 3 : l B74.2ST 7.3:1

20:l 22:l

Elm

Powr Hallo Id 2nd

251 25:1

66:l 74:l

LI, Slla Min M a

Weight

Aluminurn

Chrome

10%'' 270 mm 2 306 mm

34.6 Ibs 15.6 kg 46.3 lbs 21 kg

41.5 Ibs 18.8 kg 59.5 lbs 27 kg

7"hC 195 mm 8'K 210 mm

6 x 31-a" FH sih" 6 x B m m FH 14 mm 5 x W FH 5 x l 0 mm FH 14 mm

10'11s'' 1 3 265 mm 330 mm 107/~~" 1 3 265 mm 330 mm

59.7 lbs 27.1 kg 60 lbs 27.2 kg

70.5 lbs 32 kg 72 lbs 32.7 kg

B'/< 225 mm 6 ' 225 mm

6 x W FH C 6 x l 0 mm FH 14 mm 6 x W FH C 6 x l 0 mm FH 14 mm

K ' 19 mm

Mnbllar

\Modubr :%

BK56.3

BK563ST

BK64.3

BK643ST

BK66.3

BK66.3ST

BK74.3

BK74.3ST

19 mm

'h'' 19 mm

W 19 mm

129

Three speed self-tailing winches are ideal sheet winches on larger boats. The three speeds allow sheets to be trimmed quickly, even in heavy conditions. Self-tailing allows one crew to handle the entire trimming task - perfect for cruising or racing boats. First gear is selected by depressing the name plate ring next to the winch handle socket. Use first gear for fast sheet trimming in light to moderate air, or ignore first in very heavy conditions:~ouded with Harken's large drum diameters, three speed Redline self-tailing winches offer very high line speeds for racing or fast cruising.

No.

111

B56.3ST

2.2:l

6 w r Raiio 211 3rd 5:l

13:l

B64.3ST

2.3:l

5.7:l 16.5:l

B66.3ST

2.8:l

7.3:l

B74.3ST

2.8:l

7.3:l

20:l 22:l

1sl 9:l

Pnwr Rail8 2ld 3rd 21:l

56:1

By special order, the 874.3 can be provided with power ratios of 85:1 or 92:l for use on high loads such as found on very large boats or multihulls. All large three speed winches offer drums supported by ball bearings, two gears driving the drum, 17-4 PH stainless shaft pins. and roller bearings on all gears. Addilionl IRfomIiliw - See pages 118 and 119 for an explanation of special features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. Ordorhg lnlormslion- Specify winch drum material by adding A (aluminum). B (polished bronze) or C (chromed bronze) to part number. Polished bronze by special order only. W8hM Aluminurn CllroM

Rebmrs

Orurn Ohmlhr

Bus Oilmdr

4%" 120mm

B'/< 225mm

IOW 270mm

33.7 Ibs 15.3 kg

44.1 1bs 20 kg

7"hs" 195mm

6 x Vs" FH 6 x 8 m m FH

Lim S l a uin

YSX

l " 14mm

19mm

]/I"

22.5:l

64:l

5'18" 130 mm

9% 245 mm

ll'%d' 300mm

50.0 ibs 22.6 kg

59.5 lbs 27 kg

8'W 210mm

5 x K" FH +he'' 5 x l 0 m m FH 14 mm

3W 19mm

9.311 25:l

66:I

5'ia" 150 mm

10~1~~'' 13" 265 mm 330 mm

59.5 lbs 27.1 kg

70.6 lbs 32 kg

8'1< 225 mm

6 x %" FH %a" 6 x l 0 mm FH 14 mm

22 mm

5%" 150 mm

I07hi' 265 mm

60.4 ibs 27.4 kg

71.4 lbs 32.4 kg

8%" 225 mm

6 x %" FH %s" 6 x l 0 mm FH 14 mm

'K 22 mm

9:l

9.3-1 25:l

14:l

13"

330 mm

WIDE BODY SELF- TAILING WINCHES

T h e B964 and B980 are wide body self-tailing winches which may be used as standard top action winches or with pedestal, electric, or hydraulic drive to permit trimming of very high loads on sheets and halyards of the largest boats. The B964.2ST and B980.2ST are two speed winches used on large cruising boats. The 8964.3ST and B980.3ST are three speed winches used on large mcer/cruisers or whenever high line speed is desired. The large drum diameter provides extra surface area for sufficient wraps to handle very high loads and also offers extra speed in sheeting. Pwt No.

6slr Rltio 1st

2nd

3rd

Power Altio 2nd 3rd

Drum Dimnetor

Drums on wide body self-tailing winches are available in aluminum, chromed bronze, or stainless steel. Larger wide body winches are shown on pages 142 and 143.

Addifioml inlormfim - See pages 118 and 119 for an explanation of special features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. Ordrring lnlormation - Specify winch d ~ material m by adding A (aluminum), B (polished bronze), C (chromed bronze), or SS (stainless steel) to part number. Polished bronze by special order only.

BIu Dlantlr

'liuMAiuninm

Wlight Cbom

Sbini~l

hilanor Circir

RUenan

Litc O i m m r Min M8x

Electric winches offer cruising sailors the convenience of powered winches in a very easily installed system. Harken offers the most complete line of electric winches available with sizes ranging from the 048.2 which is suitable for use as a primary winch on boats as small as 37 feet ( l 1 m) and for halyards on boats from 43 feet (13 m). All Harken electric winches, including the smaller sizes, operate in two speeds both when using the electric motor or when cranking by hand. This two speed capability in the powered mode on the smaller winches is unusual and is of great significance for smaller boats and for halyards because it insures high speed operation under low loads while retaining high power for high loads. Electric winches from the 56 may be ordered with three speeds to provide very high line speeds. Operation is by use of simple waterproof switches which are located near the winch. The crew may select either first or second gear depending on the load. The winch reverts to manual operation when a locking handle is inserted so the boat can be raced or cruised without use of the electric system, Insertion of the handle automaticallv disconnects the electrical svstem to Drevent use of the electric motor with a winch handle inserted. Harken electric winches through the B980 operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Larger winches use 24 volts. The motors are traction type motors which offer exceptionally high line speeds at low loads for faster sheeting during tacks. Motors are mounted horizontally to minimize use of space below decks. The anchor plate allows separate disassembly of the winch and the motorlgear reduction assembly. Both the motor and -gear reduction box feature s~ecialanti-corrosion protection. Pxt H,.

Drum Dimdar

W BI Dirrm*r

B48.2STE

4 102 mm 4%" 112 mm 43K 120 mm

7%" 190 mm 877hi' 220 mm 88" 225 mm 941" 245 m 107/~a" 265 mm 101' 265 mm 1 0 1 265 mm 10'1-E 265 mm

B53.2STE B56.2STE 864.2STE B66.2STE B74.2STE B964STE B980STE BllOOSTE B1120STE

h "

130 mm 5%" 150 mm 58" 150 mm 68" 175 mm 68" 175 mm 10'L" 260mm 11'Ra" 300 mm

360 mm 2 0 1 425 mm

H'llM E 941" 245 mm 10%e' 265 mm

1%" 45 mm 1%" 45 mm l 1%" 285 mm 45 mm 12%'' 1%" 320 mm 45 mm 1341" 1%" 345 mm 45 mm 13%' 1 345 mm 45 mm 13W 1 345 mm 45 mm 13W 1%" 345 mm 45 mm 1 0 ' S / ~ i 2%" 275 mm 70 mm 11 1 4$%" 290 mm 122 mm

"Line speed measured with line under load

The waterproof control panels contain fuses and command switches. Boxes are chosen by winch size and voltage. Boxes are available to control one or two winches. Boats with more electric winches require additional boxes. Each winch needs two BRS 100 switches. All Redline electric winches are self-tailing, featuring Harken's ball bearing roller to improve efficiency and to reduce wear on the sheets. The jaws of these self-tailing winches adjust to accept different diameters of line by depressing and turning the spring loaded top plate. Harken electric winches offer all of the high efficiency features of our standard winches, including drums which ride on ball bearings, all metal bearings cages, 17-4 PH stainless drive gears, and roller bearings on the center shafts and gear pins. Electric winches may be converted to hydraulic drive by replacing the motor and controls. Electric winches to the B980 are available with aluminum or chrome drums. The B1100 and B1120 are available with aluminum or aluminumlstainless drums. ArWiIimI lntarnrrllon - See pages 118 and 119 for an explanation of special features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. Ordrrq Inlw~~lIlon-Specify winch drum material by adding A (aluminum), AISS (aluminumlstainless steel). B (polished bronze) or C (chromed bronze) to part number. Polished bronze by special order only. Each winch requires two BRS 100 switches and each boat requires appropriate control panels. Three speed winches from the 56 are available order. bv. s~ecial , WllpM Alunlnn c*o'*/

IM'I

7'hs" 180 mm 7'11s'' 180 mm 7 180 mm l

200 mm 7'h" 200 mm 7'h" 200 mm 7%" 200 mm 7 200 mm 8'h" 225 mm 108" 276 mm

121'' 326 mm

49.6 lbs 22.5 kg l " 54.5 13s 326 mm 24.7 kg 12'3lxi' 59.5 lbs 326 mm 27 kg l / 117 1bs 326 mm 53 kg 12'%r' 126 lbs 326 mm 57 kg 12'%rm 127 lbs 326 mm 57.5 kg 17'h" 130 lbs 435 mm 59 kg 178" 130 IbS 435 mm 59 kg 172' 435 mm 17'%6" 450 mm

58 lbs 26.3 kg 66.1 1bs 30 kg 69.4 1bS 31.5 kg 128 lbs 58 kg 142 lbs 64.5 kg 143 lbs 65 kg

138 Ibs* 62.5 kg 192 Ibs* 87 kg

RIUnar Clrrlc

6%" 155 mm 7'hs" 180 mm 7"h6" 195 mm 8'K 210 m B7h" 225 mm 8'h" 225 mm 8%' 225mm 8%" 225mm 12%" 255 mm 14%" 350 mm

Llw Slza Mln Max

6 x Jlls" FH 6 x 8 mm FH 6 X %E" FH 6 x 8 mm FH 7 x %s" FH 7 x 8 mm FH 5 X X" FH 5 X 10 mm FH 6xWFH 6 x 10 mm FH 6xWFH 6 x 10 mm FH 6xWFH 6 x 1 0 m m FH 6xWFH 6 x l O m m FH 6 x W FH 6 x 10 mm FH 12 X W FH 12 x 10 mn FH

12 mm 'K 12 mm 14 mm %I"

14 mm %e'

14 mm I 14 mm

41" 16 mm W

16 mm W 19 mm 'L" 19 mm 4''

19 mm >K 19 mm

14mm K" 14mm W 14 mm H" 14 mm

20mm ' 1

20mm h"

22 mm 1" 25 mm

Urn S@

: i M1nYII& 30.4 ft 9.2 m 26.7 ft 8.1 m 28.4 ft 8.6 m 21 5 fi 6.5 m 20.5 ft 6.2 m 20.5 ft 6.2 m 18.8 ft 57m 18.8 ft 57m 25.1 ft 7.6 m 20.5 ft 6.2 m

12.5 f i 3.8 m 11.6 i t 3.5 m 11.2 11 3.4 m 8.3 fi 2.5 m 7.9 fi 2.4 m 7.9 ft 2.4 m 6.3 ft 19m 6.3 ft 19m 8.3 ft 2.5 m 7.3 ft 2.2 m

BRSlM)

Remote Switch

25 oz

3'h

2 oer winch

Control Boxes For WIrhas

VWp

Longlh

HolgM

B48.2STE. B53.2STE. B56.2STE BEB600-24-1 B48.2STE, 853.2STE. B56.2STE 8EBM)O-12-2 B482STE. B53.2STE, B56.2STE

9'K 250 mm 9'18'' 250 mm 12W 315mm

78" 200 mm 7%" 200 mm 9'11s'' 230mm

3'51!s" 100 mm 3qY16'' 100 mm 5'1s'' 130mm

8EB600-24-2 B48.2STE. B532STE, B562STE BEB1000-12-2 B642STE. 8662STE. 8742STE BEB1000-24-2 B642STE. B662STE. B74.2STE BEB1500-12-2 B964STE B98OSTE BEB2000-24-2 B980STE, BllOOSTE

BEB2500-24-1 B1120STE

W 315mm 1216" 315mm 12% 315mm 12%315mm 12W 315mm 12W 315 mm

BEB2500-24-2 B1120STE

9'16 230mm 9'11s'' 2Mmm 9'll< 2Mmm 9'11s" 2Mmm 9'11s'' 230mm 9'hs" 230 mm 12%~" 320 mm

5%" 130mm 5%" 130mm 5%" 130mm 5'18'' 1Mmm 5'1a" 130mm 5'U 130 mm 5% 130 mm

BEB600-12-1

Power Amps Amp ~ a t r 12 v011 24 VOH 48.2STE 53.2STE 56.2STE 64.2STE 66.2STE 74.2STE 964STE 980STE 11OOSTE 112OSTE

700 700 700 l000 1000 1000 2000 2000 2000 2600

RPM

I Z VOII

24 v011

100 100 100 140 140 140 -

50 50 50 70 70 70 115

2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 2000

2800 2800 2800 2900 2900 2900 1900

115 115 150

2000 -

1900 1900 2300

Wlrhos

400 mm

M a n y cruising boats use hydraulics for windlasses, furling, centerboard lifts, vangs, and backstays, and this power source may also be used to drive Harken hydraulic two speed sell-tailing winches. Use of a central hydraulic power source reduces weight and noise as only one motor is required to drive the entire system. All Harken hydraulic winches, including the smaller sizes, operate in two speeds both when using the hydraulic motor or when cranking by hand. This two speed capability in the powered mode on the smaller winches is unusual and is of great significance for smaller boats and for halyards because it insures high speed operation under low loads while retaining high power for high loads. Hydraulic winches from the 56 may be ordered with three speeds to provide very high line speeds. Operation is by use of simple waterproof switches and reliable, easy to service, electric controls. The crew may select either first or second gear depending on the load. The winch reverts to manual operation when a locking handle is

inserted so the boat can be raced or cruised without use of the hydraulic system, Insertion of the handle automatically disconnects the powered system to prevent use of the hydraulic motor with a winch

All Redline hydraulic winches are self-tailing, featuring Harken's ball bearing roller to improve efficiency and to reduce wear on the sheets. The jaws of these self-tailing winches adjust to accept different diameters of line by depressing and turning the spring loaded top plate. All Harken hydraulic winches offer all of the high efficiency features of our standard winches, including drums which ride on ball bearings, all metal bearing cages, 17-4 PH stainless drive gears, and roller bearings on the center shafts and gear pins. Hydraulic winches to the B980 are available with aluminum or chrome drums. The B1100 and B1120 are available with aluminum or aluminumlstainless drums. AWitbanrrl I ~ I R I I / See ~ pages 118 and 119 for an explanation of s ecial features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. &dwirrglrrlormlia~- Specify winch drum material by adding A (aluminurn), AISS (aluminumlstainless steel), B (polished bronze) or C (chromed bronze) to part number. Polished bronze by special order only. Each winch requires two BRS 100 switches and each boat requires an appropriate hydraulic power unit. Three speed winches from the 56 are available by special order.

handle inserted. All hydraulic motors are vertically mounted. The motor and the gear reduction assembly feature special corrosion protection. All hydraulic lines and motors are standard hydraulic components so that winches are easily serviced anywhere in the world.

Rrt

B48.2STH

far

-0

4" 7'k" 102 mm 190 mm B532STH 4%6 8"h" 112 mm 220 mm B56.2STH 491" 8'h" 120 mm 225 mm B64.2STH 5%" 9%" 130 m 245 mm B66.2STH 58" IO7l1s" 150 mn 265 mm B74.2STH 5W 101 ' 1s" 150 mn 265 mn B964STH 68" 10' 175 m 265 mn B980STH 6 10%$ 175 mm 265 mn B1100STH 10'h" 14 260 mm 355 m B1120STH 11'Yls" 20'11s' 300 mm 510 mn

9 228 mm 9'Ki' 250 mm IOW 270 mm 12%" 308 mm 13" 330 mm 13" 330 mm 13" 330 m 13" 330 mm 10'%s" 275 mn 14'%s" 380 m

'Line speed measured with Line unda Load

3%" 82 mm 3%" 82mm h 82 mm 3%" 82 mm 3%" 82 mm 3'h" 82 mm 3%" 82 mm 3%" 62 mm 3%" 82 mm 3%" 82 mm

8'Ym" 227 mm 8'Ya" 227 mm 8'456" 227 mm 9'hd' 230 mm 9'ld 230 mm 9'hd' 230 mm 9'lrd' 230 mm 9'hd' 230 mm 9H" 241 mm 9%" 247 mm

wtcm

Ahmhum

4'h" 105 mm 4%" 105mm 4'K 105 mm 4'h" 105 mm 4%" 105 mm 4%" 105 mm 4 105 mm 4%" 105 mm 4%" 105 mm 4%" 105 mm

Chm IMSS'I 49.6 Ibs 22.5 kg 56 Ibs 25.4 kg 62.6 1bs 28.4 kg 73.2 lbs 33.2 kg 65.3 Ibs 38.7 kg 85.8 1bs 38.9 kg 78.3 IbS 35.5 kg 83.8 Ibs

44.3 ibs 20.1 kg 49.8 Ibs 22.6 kg 55.3 lbs 25.1 kg 67 lbs 30.4 kg 80 lbs 36.3 kg 80.5 lbs 36.5 kg 75 ibs 34 kg 80.5 lbs 36.5 kg 38 kg 89.7 lbs 95.9 ibs* 40.7 kg 43.5 kg 154Ibs* 69.8 kg

F*n

Wn,m

6H.I 155 mm 7'h' 16Omm 7"hs" 195 mm 8'W 210 mm

6x%s'FH 6 X 8 mm FH 6 x%r" FH Gx6mm FH 7 X%< FH 7 X 8 mm FH 5x%"FH 5 X l 0 mm FH 6xWFH 6 X 10 mm FH 6x%"FH 6 X 10 mm FH 6xW"FH 6 X 10 mm FH 6x%"FH 6 X 10 mm FH 6X %F "H 6 X 10 mm FH 12xWFH 12 X 10 mm FH

8K '

225 mm 8%" 225 mm 8'h" 225 mm 18 ;' 225 mm 12%" 315 mm 14'h" 480 mm

LIM Sir8 Mu 'h"

Ya"

12 mm

16 mm W 16mm %" 19 mm %" 19 mm W 19 mm

12 mm 14 mm

%C 14 mm %d' 14 mm %S"

14 mm %" 14 mm W 14 mm W 14 mm W l 4 mn

19 mm %" 20 mm %" 20 mm %"

22 mm 1'' 25 mm

LI* S p * Rr linul8. lrt 2nl 31.5 It 9.6 m 26.2 11 8m 28.5 11 8.7 m 26.9 It 8.2 m 24.3 11 7.4 m 24.3 It 7.4 m 27.6 11 8.4 m 21 11 6.4 m 35.1 I f 10.7 m 40.7 11 12.4 m

12.1 f l 3.7 m 10.8 ff 3.3m 11 A 3.35 m 9.8 It 3m 8.9 It 2.7 m 7.9 11 2.4 m 6.9 11 2.7 m 7.2 It 2.2 m 12.8 ff 3.9 m 9.8 It 3m

3 HYDRAULIC POWER UNITS Harken offers three sizes of hydraulic power units plus custom sizes for special applications. These are centrally positioned power units supplying hydraulic power to different functions on the boat. Each power unit can be supplied with different configurations and with different functions. With these power units it is possible to serve all of the hydraulic requirements on a boat - winches, mainsail furling, genoa furling, anchor windlass, steering, lifting keels, and davits, may all be powered by Harken hydraulic power units. The range starts with the Hydro 4 for boats 45 to 60 feet (13 to 18 m). The Hydro 6 is designed for boats from 55 to 70 feet (16 to 21 m). Boats over 70 feet (21 m) use the Hydro 8. The power units are driven by 12 or 24 volt electric motors. All of the hydraulic connections are made with standard high performance hydraulic fittings. These systems are very simple and use commonly available components so that service is possible worldwide. The Hydro 6 and 8 use two motors. A manual switch allows selection of one or both motors at any time. Two motors allow extra power and provide a backup power source.

Every power unit is tailored to its specific use. Pressure and flow can be adjusted on the pump during installation to insure equal pressure and flow at each valve. If required each valve may be fitted with separate pressure and flow regulators. For large boats, custom power units are available. Harken will be happy to work with owners and builders to design proper hydraulic systems for any boat. For further information and technical specifications, contact Harken.

I] RSlOO

Dlacriplim Remote Switch

L8*fh

Heigl

4 K 102mm 20mm

Hydra 4

Small Power Unit

3, 4. 5. 6

150 bar

26.5 quarts 25 liten

9.5 qtlmin 9 lillmin

2000

Hydro 6

Medium Power Unit

3. 4. 6. 9

150 bar

26.5 auans 25 liiers

19 otlmin 18 litlmin

Hvdro 8

Laroe Power

3. 6. 9

180 bar

74.2 auans 70 'IPIS

38 otlmin 36 'I m n

.n I

'Vanes s lgnl y oepend ng on n~mberof 1-ncr onr

OeNh

25 oz

83mm

Weight 2 per winch

7100

120

88 Ibs. 40 kg

2 X 2000

240 -

132 ~- Ibs. 60 kg

2- X 3000

360

198 ibs~

~~~~

135

All racing winches feature a nainlesisteel handle socket for \ maximum durability.

Drums are in hard anadwed aluminum with large winches offwed with wmbination aluminum/stainless Steel dNMS.

de body winch drums iture hollow between interior and exterior drums to reduce weight.

rge winches feature lcial aluminum or .,dinless drum gears for long term reliability.

Tor on rol er oearlngs roe n arge olametel cages to allow more bearings to cany the load.

9:/) Large diameter spindles form a lzqe bearing surface to pmpedy c a m the load.

Drive gears are 17-4 PH stainless steel with specially finished wohing surfaces.

Cenler shafts on all racing winches ride on mlla bearings.

Winches as small as the 48 feature mller bearings in every gear.

Pawls are held captive by the / springs. They are easy to remove but won't drop out accidently during service.

Gears on winches from the 45 feature four pawls lor maximum reliability and to minimize backlash.

High load canying gear pins are 17-4 PH stainless steel for maximum strength and durability.

Larger W nches .se !m, gean 10 dr~redrums l h ~ sm c e s tne load on ine ohm gear and loads lne drum symmetrically which improves efficiency.

Racers at all levels know that light boats are faster. Leading edge boats are designed and built to exacting standards to keep weight out. These boats demand extremely light winches with high efficiency and total reliability. Harken answers these needs with a line of racing winches which combine the meticulous attention to detail of the best Italian craftsmen with the space age American technology which has made Harken an institution in racing circles for over 20 years. Harken's Torlone racing winches are the ultimate winches for serious racing boats. Weights are extremely low and reliability and efficiency are extremely high. Torlon racing winches are not simply standard winches modified for lighter weights. From the hard anodized alloy bodies and drums, and the Torlon roller bearings riding in large diameter cages, to the Torlon balls carrying vertical loads on the drum and the 17-4 PH gears and gear pins, Harken Torlon racing winches are bred for performance. Fmm small two speed self-tailers to enormous wide body pedestal driven winches, Harken offers the most complete range of racing winches available. They meet evely need on any racing boat. 136

Torlon@ IIo1111rBsarigs Race proven for years in Harken's big boat hardware, Torlon bearings are reliable, low friction bearings perfectly suited to racing winches. Torlon bearings are substantially lighter than stainless steel bearings and their use is an important element in the overall weight savings in Harken's racing winches.

Spood-Locr" Speed-Lock is a modular feature which can be added to any three speed Torlon Racing Winch to allow it to be held in the two faster speeds for offwint and light air work. Speed-Lock may be added without complete disassembly of the winch.

Com~leloRag8 Unlike many winch builders, Harken offers a full range of racing winches. These include 8 two speed self-tailers, 5 three speed winches, 9 three speed wide body winches, 3 four speed wide body winches, and 6 three speed self-tailing wide body winches. Add modular Soeed-Lock and vou have the caoabilitv, of orovidina the perfect winch for any racihg application. '

Torlon bearings ride on specially finished hard anodized surfaces of the winch body. Torlon roller bearings ride in very large diameter cages to allow more bearings to carry the load. Less load per bearing translates into less friction and high efficiency and longer life. Torlon roller bearings require only the lightest lubricants so drag when trimming by hand is extremely low. Maintenance is reduced to frequent freshwater flushing and occasional cleaning and lubricating of gears.

Winches disassemble for service with simple hand tools. Bases of winches remain secured to deck when winch is disassembled.

Stain ess tastenen %,re lo sla n ess sleel nel CO I nsetts

H@h Eff/c/my Bfl-rai~~ng The patented ball bearing roller on the stripper arm protects sheets against wear and reduces friction. The self-tailing arms are a lightweight special alloy and are adjustable to 22 positions after the winch is mounted so the crew may select the best position for your boat. The special jaw configuration of the self-tailing mechanism can be adjusted to match your sheet diameter. Because the jaws allow the line to seat on the same diameter as the winch drum, there is no efficiency lost by the tailer mechanism carrying the load. Non-adjustable self-tailers can offer optimal performance with only one sheet diameter.

1 l

All bases leature large drain holes.

Four speed wide body racing winches offer crews a 1:loverdrive speed for very fast trimming of the genoa in light conditions or of the spinnaker at any time while retaining a geared first speed for heavy air work. This option of a 1:l or geared first speed offers great flexibility and faster trimming in all conditions. The 1:l speed is selected by means of a lever switch conveniently located in the top cleat. When this high speed is selected, the normal geared first speed is locked out of the speed selection until normal speeds are again selected. Gears are changed in the normal fashion of three speed winches by reversing handle direction. 137

Three speed racing winches are the heart of any racing boat's winch package. They are ideal for most primary and secondary winch applications. Larger boats will often use three speed winches for halvards ~, as well. The high speed first gear is engaged by depressing the name plate ring. Use first gear for fast sheet trimming in light to moderate air, or ignore first gear in very heavy conditions. Coupled with Harken's large drum diameters, three speed racing winches offer very high line speeds. ~~~

dto!

6U R*ID 2nd

3rd

irt

R m r llrtio 2nd 3rd

Drum OinnM

These winches may be ordered with Speed-Lock" to keep the winch in the faster first and second gear, a valuable feature in light air or downwind. Three speed racing winches are offered with anodized aluminum drums and feature Harken's exclusive Torlon bearings for exceptional weight savings. A W l l h l l~~hfmaIlon - See pages 136 and 137 for an explanation of special See pages 120 and 121 for suggested O&infl inlomNBn To order winches with Speed-Lock'", add SL to the part number.

Iru Dll~or

Hal@l

wlym

TWO SPEED SELF- TAILING RACING WINCHES I

B40 2STR

. ,

T w o speed self-tailing racing winches are ideal for most primary, secondary, halyard, running backstay and control line applications. Eight winches are offered to handle functions from primaries on halftonners and halyards on three quarter tons to running backstays on maxis. The self-tailing mechanism features Harken's patented ball bearing roller to improve efficiency and easily adjustable jaw widths to suit a Part No.

1st

6881 Ratio 2nd

Powar Ratio Isl 2nd

B322STR

24:l

47.1

16:l

B40.2STR

2 2.1

6:l

135:l

variety of line sizes. The stripper arm on racing winches is lightweight aluminum. Two speed racing winches are offered with hard anodized aluminum drums and feature Harken's exclusive Torlon bearings lor exceptional weight savings, low friction and high performance. Addilionol lnhrmafion - See pages 136 and 137 for an explanation of special features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. Line Sizn Mln M8x

Orum Oi8matlr

RISE OilmMsr

H8iuM

Wsighl

Faslansn

32:l

2'%< 74 mm

58" 136 mm

6'11i 164 mm

8.4 Ibs 3.8 kg

4'1s" 105mm

5x'KFH 5x6mmFH

W 91~s" 10mm 14mm

40:l

3 76 mm

5'11>C 145 mm

619i 176 mm

9.7 Ibs 4.4 kg

4'hi'

112mm

5 X '1" FH 5x6mmFH

Y 9110" 10mm 14mm

3%'' 92 mm

6"hs" 170mm

8'K 206 mm

11.3 IbS 5.1 kg

5'11e" 128 mm

5 X % < FH 5 x 8 mm FH

W %a" l O m m 14 mm

7'12" 190 mm 8"l>i' 220 mm

g 228 mm g'%< 250 mm

16.1 lbs 7.3 kg 19.2 Ibs 8.7 kg

6'V 155mm

6 X 51?< FH 6x8mmFH

l W 12mm 16mm

7'ha" 180mm

6x%i'FH 6x8mmFH

W Ye'' 12mm 16mm

845.2STR

2.5:l

8 2.1

138:l

441

848.2STR

25:l

10:l

125:l

4k1

B532STR

3:1

12:l

14:l

53:l

102 mm 4'118" 112mm

0562STR

5:l

13:l

21:l

56:l

43K 120 mm

B'/< 225 mm

lob" 270 mm

23.6 Ibs 10 7 kg

7"11s" 195 mm

6 x Y l i FH 6 x 8 mm FH

Vt6" >K 14 mm 19 mm

0642STR

5.7:l

16.5:l

225:l

64:l

5'18'' t30mm

9%245 mm

12'V 308 mm

30.6 1bs 13 9 kg

8 ' ~ 210 mm

5 x W FH 5 x l 0 mm FH

Ym" 14 mm 19 mm

0742STR

73:l

22 1

25:l

74:l

5%'' 150 mm

10%a" 265 mm

1 3 330mm

41.7 ibs 189kg

8'18'' 225mm

6 x W FH 6xlOmmFH

ha" K ' 14mm 19mm

SE1F- TAILING RACING WINCHES Three speed self-tailing racing winches are used as primary and secondary winches and for halyards on larger boats. The self-tailing mechanism features Harken's patented ball bearing roller to improve efficiency and easily adjustable jaw widths to suit a variety of line sizes. The stripper arm on racing winches is lightweight aluminum. The high speed first gear is engaged by depressing the name plate ring. Use first gear for fast sheet trimming in light to moderate air, or ignore first gear in v v heavy conditions. Coupled with Harken's large d ~ diameters, m three speed racing winches offer very high line speeds.

B563STA B64.3STR B74.3STR

2.2:l 2.3:l 2.8:l

5:l 57:l 7.3:l

13:1 16.5:1 22:l

9:l 9:l 9.3:l

21.1 22.5:l 25:l

56:I

64:l

14:l

4W 12Omm 5H" 130mm 58" 150 mm

These winches may be ordered with Speed-Lock" to keep the winch in the faster first and second gear, a valuable feature in light air or downwind. Three speed self-tailing racing winches are offered with hard anodized aluminum dmms and feature Harken's exclusive Torlon bearings for exceptional weight savings. AlWltlowl linfmrtion - See pages 136 and 137 for an explanation of s ecial features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. &8flq Ihfdlltlllorr- To order winches with Speed-Lock", add SL to the part number.

88" 225 mm 9%" 245mm IO7l1s" 265 mm

IOW 270 mm ll / 300mm 13 330 mm

27.8 lbs 12.6 kg 35.3 lbs 16kg 46.3 ibs 21 kg

7"hs" 195mm 8'k" 210mm 8W 225 mm

6 X %G" FH 6 x 8 m m FH 5 x W FH 5xIOmmFH 6 X W FH 6 x l 0 mm FH

P118"

14mm

19mm

%c'

14mm

19mm

Y16"

14 mm

22 mm

WIDE BODY THREE SPEED RACING WINCHES

1 These winches may be ordered with Speed-Lock" to keep the winch in the faster first and second gear, a valuable feature in light air or downwind. Three speed wide body racing winches are offered with anodized aluminum drums. The B560 is also offered with a combination alumi. num and stainless steel drum for wire sheets. AddlIIoml infomn'on - See pages 136 and 137 for an explanation of s ecial features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. Brdwinl l~)lormsIinn- Specily winch drum material by adding A (aluminum) or A/SS (aluminum/stainless steel) to the part number. To order winches with Speed-Lock'", add SL to the part number.

Smaller wide body three speed racing winches are ideal primary and secondary winches on boats from 35 to 44 feet (10 to 13.5 m). The 530 series was developed specifically for today's competitive one tonners. The wide body's large drum diameter gives exceptional line speed for faster trimming. These wide body racing winches are all supplied with a top cleat for fast, convenient securing of sheets. The high speed first gear is engaged by depressing the name plate ring. Use first gear for fast sheet trimming in light to moderate air, or ignore first gear in very heavy conditions.

1n R480TCR B530TCR

B560TCR

1:) 1:1 2.2:l

6 u r AaNo

2nd

3rd

4:1

10:1

39:l

5:l 5:l

12:1 16:1

3.93

P m r Ratio

O m Ollmdnr

Bau OimmUlr

15.6:l 49:l

4'V 120mm

190 mm

7K"

Pl6' 192 mm

16.5 ibs 7.5 kg

47:l

5'h 130mm

8"hd' 220 mm

51" 150 mm

8'18'' 225 mm

8%< 215 mm 9'K 235 mm

19.2 lbs 8.7 kg 25.6 lbs 11.6 kg

2nd

19:1

74:1 16.2:l

3rd

55:l

Aluminurn

Wal#M

AlumfSS

28.9 1bS 13.1 kg

htlomr Cldo

Fastnor8

155mm

68"

6 x Ytd' FH 6xBmmFH

18Omm

7'hs"

6 x Y16" FH 6xBmmFH

7"hC 195 mm

7 x % a ' FH 7 x 8 mm FH

Rob Mccreadyphoto

Large wide body racing winches are perfect for primary and w o n daly functions on large racing boats. They may be used in conjunction with pedestal drives or top driven. The 6980, with a power ratio of 80:1, is an ideal runner winch for fractionally rigged maxi boats. The wide body offers exceptional line speed for faster trimming and the top cleat offers a convenient location to secure the sheet. A variety of gearing options available with pedestal drives offers up to six speeds for these large winches. These winches may be ordered with Speed-Lock" to keep the winch in the faster first and second gear, a valuable feature in light air or downwind.

B964TC B98OTC

Ill

6mr Ratio 2nd

3rd

2.8:l

731

22:l

8:l

28:l

731

278:l

8:l

BllOOTC

27:l

8.2:l

25.8:l 5.2:l

B112OTC

2:l

114:l

33.4:l

3.4:l

POW Rllio In( 3rd 21:l 21:l 159:l

641

BO:I

50.9:l

19.3:l 56.5:1

ON. Oirnlt.

Drums are available in light weight aluminum or with a combination of aluminum and stainless steel for use with wire sheets or exceptionally high loads. These winches feature Haken's race proven Torlon bearings for light weight and high performance.

AWilionrl I ~ l -mSee pages 136 and 137 for an explanation of special features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses and pages 145 through 149 for compatible pedestal systems. Ordwiq inlomlh - Specify winch d ~ material m by adding A (aluminurn) or AISS (aluminumlstainlesssteel) to the part number. To order winches with Speed-Lock", add SL to the pan number.

hn Dlamnr

6%'

10'116"

175 mm

265 mm

64'

175 mm 10%"

260 mm ll'~11s"

lO%s" 265 mm 14 355 mm 20'1:s"

Hair I l l

300 mm 11'Ks'

300mm 10'h" 260 mm

1431~s'

WaioM Muminurn AIun1SS

42.5 ibs 19.3 kg 42.5 lbs 19.3 kg 57.3 ibs 26 kg 83.1 lbs

43 lbs 19.5 kg 45.2 ibs 20.5 kg 68.3 ibs 31 kg 97 lbs

hswr Chin 84'

onl*rFl

6xWFH

225 mm

6 x 10 mm FH

8%" 225 mm 12W 315 mm 14%"

6 x 10 mm FH 6xW"FH 6 x 10 mm FH

6xWFH

12xWFH

l BllOOSTRA

RACING WINCHES W i d e body three speed self-tailing racing winches are useful for sheets, halyards and secondary functions on large offshore boats. The B560 is top driven. The B964 and B980 may be either top driven or integrated into a pedestal system. The B1100 and B1120 are for use with pedestal systems. The wide drums offer exceptional line speed for faster trimming and the self-tailing mechanism reduces the need for a crew to tail the line. A variety of gearing options available with pedestal drives offers up to six speeds for these large winches. Drums are available in lightweight aluminum or with a combination of aluminum and stainless steel for use with wire sheets or exceptionally high loads.

m NO.

111

B560STR

22:l

B964STR B980STR

28:l 2.8:l

6mr RISO 2nd 3rd 5:l 73:1

16.1:l 22:l

7.33 27.8:l

111

Pmnr Ratio 2nd 3rd

7.4

162:l 55:l

8:l 8:l

21:1 21:1

64:l 80:1

BllOOSTR

2.7:l

8.2:l 25.8:l 5.2:1 15.9:l 50.3:l

B1120STR

2:1

114:l 334:l 3.4:1 19.3:1 56.51

Drum DB I ~ ~ a * t a r M8moiw 5'6" 150mm 66" 175mm 6 175mm 10'h" 260 mm l

300 mm

8%" 225mm 0 1 265mm 10'1d 265 mm 14 355 mm 20'ha" 510 mm

The 6560. B964 and B980 may be ordered with Speed-Lock" to keep the winch in the faster first and second gear. These winches feature Harken's race proven Torlon bearings for exceptionally light weight and low maintenance.

Addilion81 Inlprm8tron - See pages 136 an0 137 lor an explanal~onof spec~alfeat~res See pages 120 and 121 for sLqgesleo Jses ana paqes . 145 through 149 for compatible pedestal systems.

OIdsrq infomIion - Specify winch drum material by adding A (aluminum) or A/SS (aluminum/stainless steel) to the part number. To order winches with Speed-Lock'", add SL to the part numberTo order the B964 and B980 for pedestal drive add PD to the part number.

n8igM

10%'' 270 mm 13" 330mm 13" 330mm 1 0 275 mm 14'Yts" 380 mm

wnip~ Aluminurn AlumISS 31 5 lbs 14.3 kg 42.8 lbs 19.4 kg 47 ibs 21.3 kg 63.9 ibs 29 kg 95.2 lbs 43.2 kg

29.3 Ibs 13.3 kg 48 lbs 21.8 kg 48 Ibs 21.8 kg 71.6 ibs 32.5 kg 110.7 Ibs 50.2 kg

Cirri0

Faatmnra

7"Id 6 x '11s" FH 195 mm 6x8mm FH 8W 6 x W FH 225mm 6xlOmmFH 8'is.I 6 X W FH 225 mm 6x 1Omm FH 12W 6 x W FH 315 mm 6 x l 0 mm FH 14'/< 12 X W FH 480 mm 12 x 10 mm FH

MlnLIW 81a V<

14 mm

20 mm

56..

14mm 20mm 56..

14 mm W 14 mm 56..

14 mm

20 mm %" 22 mm 1" 25 mm

143

I FOUR SPEED WIDE BODY RACING WINCHES Four speed wide body racing winches offer crews a l:l qverdrive speed for very fast trimming of the genoa in light conditions or of the spinnaker at any time while retaining a geared first speed for heavy air work. This option of a 1:l or geared first speed offers great flexibility and faster trimming in all conditions. The 1:l speed is selected by means of a lever switch conveniently located in the top cleat. When this high speed is selected, the normal geared first speed is locked out of the speed selection until normal speeds are again selected. Gears are changed in the normal fashion of three speed winches by reversing handle direction.

Fourspeed wide body racing winches areavailable with Speed-Lock.to keep the winch in first and second gear. Speed-Lock" may be engaged with either of the two first speeds. AlWlIlpnrl linfamfi01) - See pages 136 and 137 for an explanation of ecial features. See pages 120 and 121 for suggested uses. %Mq I~~IsrnmIh-To order winches with Speed-Lock", add SL to the part number.

3 PEDESTAL SYSTEMS 1 Pedestal drive winch systems are favored for applications demanding both great speed and power. They allow one or more crew to crank from an ergonomically powerful standing position. Pedestal systems range from the simple B700 and B710 integral systems to complex custom-designed systems allowing five large winches to be cranked by eight to ten crew. Large custom installations include cutoffs to disconnect various winches and gear boxes allowing each winch to be driven with up to six speed and power ratios. Pages 145 through 149 describe the components used as the building blocks for pedestal drive winch systems. Designers, owners and builders of large boats are encouraged to work closely with Harken to design a proper system for their boat.

H@h SfmgfhCmpm~n& When very large boats are using eight or more crew to drive the winches, it is necessary to use special high strength components like stainless steel drive shafts, high strength bronzelstainless universal joints, special high strength gear boxes, and special high strength reduction gear boxes. Boats of this nature should consult with Harken for proper specification of hardware and HS should be added to all component part numbers to specify high strength components when ordering.

B700 B710

Integral surface mount pedestal base

595 mm

ll 284 mm

74, 964.

60 mm

Integral surface mount uedestal base

23'hC 595 mm

l 4 1

ll 0 0

60 mm

380 mm

The B700 and B710 surface mount pedestal systems are designed for boats where under-deck installation of transmissions and drive shafts is not desirable. They are particularly well suited to large cruising boats which are raced and all boats with a finished interior. They lend themselves very well to retrofit situations. The very low profile base is hard anodized aluminum and contains a simple chain drive using a spring-tensioned stainless steel chain. The pedestal is available in two heights. The pedestal is available with either a fixed or a rotating head which can be adjusted to suit the best position for the crew on any point of sail. Handles can be either single or double grip and faster 9 (229 mm) handles may be fitted. The B700 will accept a 66, 74.964, or 980 winch. The B710 will accept the 1100 winch. 145

PmIe3ta1s Harken pedestals are constructed of high strength, lightweight aluminum with a hard anodized finish. Pedestals are available with fixed or rotating heads. A rotating head allows the crew to vary the direction of handle rotation to best suit the situation. The crew may prefer to crank facing fore and aft while trimming spinnakers and mains and to face athwartships while tacking genoas, or otherwise vary their cranking position from time to time. Standard rotation is 90'. but other angles may be specified. Harken pedestals rotate at the head to insure long term rigidity. Rotation locks are conveniently located at the base of the head. Drive assemblies in the pedestals use stainless steel shafts. Gears are 17-4 PH stainless steel. Working surfaces of the gears are finished with a special process to reduce friction and improve efficiency. Gears all ride on 17-4 PH stainless steel double roller bearings, which carry both radial and axial loads. Drive handles are offered in chmmed bronze or racing boats may specify forged hard anodized aluminum. Handle grips ride on double rows of Delrin ball bearings for maximum efficiency and comfort Standard handle lengths are 9 (229 mm) and 1 0 (254 mm). Pedestals are offered in two standard heights but special heights are available upon request. Pedestals mount to adapter plates which accept the gear boxes and foot switches. They are hard anodized aluminum. Adapter plates are chosen according to the gear box to be used.

Cu,dom FahiUrion Harken is available to consult with designers, builders and owners regarding the fabrication of custom winch systems. Working with CAD (computer aided design) systems our specialists are capable of developing technical drawings of winch systems for either racing or cruising boats of any size.

l .'L

Cuslom doubl~m k sy~lems Custom double crank systems are designed for use with four or more men and are found on racing boats, especially 12 Meters or large multihulls. A removable version is available for large cruising boats which will use the double crank system across a cockpit while racing, but will remove it and use the top action drive or power drive on the winches for cruising. The double crank system can be used with chain, shaft or pedestal drive. The handles are high strength stainless steel and the grips ride on double races of Delrin balls for low friction and maximum efficiency.

Univcrssl Jaiols

Olive ShHS Two drive shafts are offered for pedestal systems. The standard B605 stainless steel tube shalt with splined ends is designed for high loads and maximum durability. The B606 lightweight drive shaft is a large diameter aluminum tube with splined ends. It is designed for use on light boats with a maximum of four men cranking. All drive shafts are custom made to your required length.

Universal joints are required in drive shaft installations to compensate for minor misalignments in installation and for the deformation of the boat structure while sailing. Two universal joints are available. The standard B1780 offers a maximum misalignment of +l-15'. They are used in high load situations with up to 8 men working the pedestals. They are constructed of chromed high strength bronze and stainless steel. The B1781 lightweight universal joint is constructed of high strength aluminum and stainless steel. It permits working angles of +/-2". These joints are designed for systems with a maximum of four men cranking.

Oltrrlinion

Stainless steel

2.3 Ihslll

Specify length

Chrome u-joint

WcipM 311 k 1.41 kg

700 g

PEDESTAL SYSTEMS

These sample pedestal systems show some basic arrangements possible with Harken components. The insert side view drawing shows all of the components used in a typical system including such items as gear boxes which are not shown in the top views. Unless otherwise specified, all shafts and u-joints in a drawing are the same. Many other arrangements are possible. Please contact Harken for a system which best suits your boat.

6;;; Pedsr

!:,

FC 611

;;;;-:;;;L.

606

K ,

S~ngIegear box Slngle gear box wlclutch TWO-wavaear box,NitWO clutches

box wlfour clutches Aluminumlstainles~U-joint Stair !shaft Alum~numorlve snafl

. .. .

3 GEAR BOXES I Transmission gear boxes are used to distribute power from pedestal drives to different winches. Harken offers a complete range of gear boxes for winch power transmission. The body of the boxes is hard anodized, high tensile aluminum. Gears and shafts are 17-4 PH stainless steel. Working surfaces of gears are finished with a special process to reduce friction and improve efficiency. Gears ride on 17-4 PH stainless steel double roller bearings, which carry both radial and axial loads. Gear boxes are available in three configurations: a simple gear box, a gear box with clutch, and a gear box with clutch and reduction gear. A simple gear box is generally used to connect a winch shaft with a drive shaft. The simple gear box has no disconnect and is attached to the bottom of the winch itself. A gear box with clutch is used to connect or disconnect a transmission from the pedestal system. Clutches have an on and an off position. Use of clutches allows several winches in a system to be cranked while others are left idle. They also allow several pedestals to be separated to drive winches handling very different tasks, such as trimming the main and genoa simultaneously at different speeds. Simple gear boxes and gear boxes with clutches are provided with 1:l or 1.38:l drive ratios, but other ratios are available on special order. A gear box with clutch and reduction gear is used to make a six speed winch system. This very compact gear box contains a clutch and two drive speeds. The clutch has three positions: high speed, off, and low speed. Standard drive ratios are 1:111.6:1 but other drive ratios are available by special request. Gear box components are constructed with very close tolerances and, therefore, are not offered as separate units for assembly in the field. Assembly of gear boxes with clutch andlor reduction gear are done by Harken to insure proper alignment and to guarantee the best transmission efficiency with the lightest weight. Gear box assemblies mount under deck on the adaptor plate on the pedestal bottom. Clutch engagement and disengagement and selection of reduction gears takes place by the use of foot switches which are located at the base of the pedestal drive unit.

1 7

Pall No.

D8scrlptlon

B631

Wolght

8600

Single gear box

8601

Single gear box with clutch

11.9 ~ b s 5.4 kg 20.1 Ibs 9.1 kg

8611

Two-way gear box with two clutches

26.2 Ibs 11.9 kg

8621

~hree-waygear box with three clutches

48.2 lbs 21 9 kg

8622

Angled three-way gear box with three clutches Four-way gear box with lour clutches

48.2 lbs 21 9 kg 58.5 lbs 26.5 kg

8631

-c

I".

SNUBBING WINCHES Snubbing winches are used on very large boats to reduce the dynamic loads on winches and to hold halyards after sails are raised. Many large cruising boats use snubbing winches in conjunction with powered or pedestal driven winches. After sails are hoisted using the pedestal, electric or hydraulic winch, the halyard is removed and secured on the snubbing winch, thus freeing the main winch for other uses. Snubbing winches offer greater strength than halyard stoppers, are gentle to halyards, and may be eased safely and with control even under high loads. Snubbing winches are offered in two sizes. The B812 is used on boats to 48 feet (14.6 m) while the B815 is used on larger boats. Snubbing winches are provided with top cleats so that halyards may be conveniently secured after being released from the main winch. The B812 is offered only with a chrome bronze drum. The B815 is available with aluminum or chmmed bronze. Polished bronze drums are available by special order. llrdwing -1 - Specify winch drum material bv addina A (aluminurn). B (wlished bronze) oiC (cnrimea bronze) to p a i n ~ m b ~ . Polishea oronze by spec~alorder only

-~--

8612 0615

4W 651j< 4 120mm 160mm 102mm 5W BW 6W 150 mm 225 mm 165 mm

17.4 lbs 7.9 kg

4'71<

10.1 lbs 4.6 kg

125 mm

28.7 1bs 13 kg

190 mm

7%"

6 X 'K FH 3750 lbs 7500 lbs 6 x 6 mm FH 1700 kg 3400 kg 6 X%*" FH 6560 lbs 13115 ibs 6 x 8 mm FH 2975 kg 5950 kg

Harken kits allow you to convert standard modular winches into self-tailing, three speed, or three speed self-tailing winches without the expense of purchasing new winches. Conversion is simple. The top of the winch is removed and replaced by the modular kit. Only simple hand tools are required. N o t all winches are modular to all features. Check the charts below for applications. Standard

Winches K11

Fib

Eonwrtr Winch

no.

w~nr*,

FRO

BK42.2ST BK44.2ST BK462ST BK48.2ST BK53.2ST BK56.2ST BK64.2ST

B422 044.2 046.2 048.2 053.2 056.2 8642

2 Speed 2 Speed 2 Speed 2 Speed 2 Speed 2 Speed 7 Snplvl

7 Sn-ri

BK66.2ST BK74.2ST 8K48.3 8K53.3

066.2 074.2 048.2 853.2

2 Speed 2 Speed 2 Speed

2 Speed self-falling 2 Speed self-tailing

7 Snwd

3 Snwd

BK56.3 BK64.3 BK66.3 BK74.3 BK563ST BK64.3ST

856.2 864.2 866.2 874.2 856.3 864.3

2 Speed 2 Speed 2 Speed 2 Speed 3 speed 3 speed

3 speed 3 Speed 3 speed 3 Speed 3 Speed sell-tailing 3 Speed self-tailing

2 Speed self-tailing 2 Speed self-tailing 2 Speed self-tailing 2 Speed self-tailing 2 Speed self-tailing 2 Speed self-tailing cnlf-milinn

3 Speed

Racing Winches KR No.

Wineher

FII~

B351 B352 B353 B371 B372 8391

B483R. 0480TCR. 8533R. 0530TCR B56.3R. B560TCR. 8643R. 0743R. 0964TCR. 098OTCR 8563STR. 8560STR. B643STR. 8743STR. 0964STR. 0980STR B5WTCR B964TCR. 8980TCR 0560TCR

B392

B964TCR, 0980TRC

~~~

~~~~

From ......

connrtr winch

Tn .-

3 Speed racing 3 Speed racing

3 Speed racing with Speedlock 3 Speed racing with Speedlock

3 Speed self-tailing racing 3 Speed racing 3 Speed racing

3 Speed self-tailing racing with Speedlack 4 Speed racing 4 Speed racing 4 Speed racing with Speedlock 4 Speed racing with Speedlock

3 Speed racing 3 Speed racing

151

Harken winch handles are a unique blend of good looks and smooth efficiency, the perfect complement to Redline winches and a positive addition to any winch. All nine handles feature ball bearing grips for more efficient and comfortable operation. Cruising sailors like the durability and appearance of forged chmmed bronze handles while racing sailors prefer the light, but tough, drop forged aluminum handles. Lock-in handles are easily released with a conveniently positioned thumb switch. They are safer to use as they will not slip out of the winch while you arecrankingand may be left unattended in a winch. 1 0 (254 mm) handles are the industry standard and have proven to be the most comfortable length for most people. Published power ratios are based on 1 0 (254 mm) handles. 8" (203 mm) handles are faster but reduce power by 20%. They are often used by racing crews in light air or by cruising sailors on smaller boats. Double-grip handles allow one man to crank a winch with more power or offer the option of two-man cranking. The BIOADL is designed for racing boats which seek a very light double-grip handle. The 8" (203 mm) double-grip handles are favored by racing crews seeking a combination of speed and the potential for power. Cruisers should use the chromed bronze BIOCDL double-grip handle. Harken handles fit international-standard winch sockets on all brands of winches.

Conmm SpSCli~~Nonr Stud - "he" (17.5 mm) Grip dia - 1'h" (32 mm) Grip length - 4 ' h (114 mm) 152

B8AP

8" Non-locking forged aluminum handle

B8AL

8" Lock-in forged aluminum handle 8" Lock-in double-grip forged aluminum handle 8" Lock-in double-grip forged chrome handle 10" Non-lacking forged aluminum handle 10" Lock-in forged aluminum handle 10" Lock-in forged chrome handle 10" Lock-in doublegrip forged aluminum handle 10" Lock-in doublegrip forged chmme handle

B8ADL BBCDL BIOAP BlOAL BlOCL BIOAOL BIOCOL

8 203 mm

8" 203 mm

8" 203 mm 8" 203 mm 10" 254 mm 10" 254 mm 10" 254 mm 10" 254 mm 10" 254 mm

6 168 mm 6%" 168 mm 10%" 276 mm 108" 276 mm

1 32 mm 1 32 mm 1 32 mm h 32 mm 1 38 mm

178 mm "7 . % l 178 mm 38 mm 7l'%" 178 mm 38 mm 11%" 1 1 286 mm 38 mm 1'12" 1 1 286 mm 38 mm

1102 300 g 11 oz 300 g 19 or 539 g 37 or 1.05 kg 16 or 454 g 1601 454 g 40 oz 1.15 kg 23 01 650 g 43 01 1.25 kg

HARKEN/BARBAROSSA HARDWARE

GENOA LEADCARS Harken offers a wide array of genoa lead cars and track slides suitable for metric and English track. The tri-roller lead car offers many unique advantages. The wide sheave will accept two sheets for easy sail changes and is mounted very close to the deck to permit sheeting of low clewed genoas. The vertical side rollers protect sheets and reduce friction even when leads are unfair. The single piece construction reduces noise and damage from luffing sails. Tri-roller lead cars are provided with a towing bail for adjustment and must be used with a track stop. Genoa lead blocks offer the simplicity of a pin stop type car. The pin stops can be locked in an up position to facilitate movement along the track. Track slides offer a convenient attachment point for snatch blocks or other lead blocks. They feature plastic sliders to reduce friction and to protect tracks. The pin stop may be locked in an up position. Track stops are low profile and easy to open even with cold, wet hands. T track is clear-anodized aluminum and is available only in metric sizes. O r l s r n ~InlarMion - To order trl-ro er lead cars, genoa leaa oocas and track s aes, spec l y metricor Enalish measurement bv addino" an Mor an E to the part number. 154

v..

B153 B154 B155 B156

B157 B158

Genoa lead block for 32 mm 3%" 2'K 4%" 15'12 oz 2" (l'k") track - aluminum 95 mm 54 mm 115 mm 439 g 52 mm 14 mm Genoa lead block for 3%" Z1K 4%" 34 oz 2" $Its'' 32 mm (1'11") track - chrme 95 mm 54 mm 115 mm 964 g 52 mm 14 mm Genaa lead block for 5%i' 2%" 5W 68 02 2"hs" '18'' 40 mm (1%")tra* -chrome 142 mm 70 mm 150 mm 1.95 kg 68 mm 22 mm Slide for 25 mm (1") 2%" 1 % ~ " 1W 8 0 1 track - chrme 70 mm 37 mm 41 mm 227 g Slide for 32 mm (1%") 3%" l"/!< 2Y1s" 18% 02 track - chrme 95 mm 46 mm 56 mm 524 g Slide for 40 mm (1%") S%< Z%< 2'11" 38%oz

1100 lbs 2650 lbs 500 kg 1200 kg 1895 lb6 660 kg

3850 lb6 1750 kg 4475 lb6 9920 lbb 2030 kg 4500 kg

2050 lbs 4625 Ibs 950 kg 21M) kg 3950 lbs 6150 Ibs 1800 kg 3700 kg 5500 lbs 12300 It!

)

PIfl WO.

ocscrlptlon

hglh

WMh

HdgM

B1871A Tri-roller lead car for 25 mm 3g/1C 1'Yd 3 W 90 mm 50 mm 85 mm (1") track - aluminum B1872A Tri-roller lead car lor 32 mm 4'1/1C 2%/1.1 4b/tC / l l ( track - aluminum 125 mm 70 mm 110 mm B1872C Tri-roller lead car for 4's/16" 2 W 32 mm (ll/r") track - chrome 125 mm 70 mm B1873A Tri-roller lead car for 40 mm 6"he'' 3W ( l W') track - aluminum 170 mm 85 mm B1873C Tri-roller lead car for 6flhs" 3%" 40 mm ( l W') track - chrome 170 mm 85 mm 82055 Stop for 25 mm track 32mm 43mm

4XC 110 mm 5 130 mm 5'K 130 mm

!E,${

1875 lbs 850 kg 3300 Ibs 1500 kg

3950 lbs l800 kg 7050 1bS 3200 kg

Pad

no.

Oatcri~on

31% oz iT5/ti1 %C 4950 Ibs 9900 Ibs 900 g 50 mm 14 mm 2250 kg 4500 kg

B201

25 mm T track (Sold by meter)

57 02 2 W W 1.62 kg M) mm 20 mm 57 oz 2 W 1.62 kg 60 mm 20 mm

Walm 14 oz 400 g 31'12 02 900 g

18mm 1139

82056 Stop for 40 mm track 50mm 56mm 25mm 1139 B2057 Stop for 32 mm track 50 mm 56 mm 23 mm 120 g

Mu Shwt Dla

1 8'' 38 mm 12 mm 115/~C %C 50 mm 14 mm

Workin# Lnad

4630 lbs 2109 kg 6945 lbs 3150 kg 1375 lbs 630 kg

9920 lbs 4500 kg 14300 lbs 6500 kg 2850 Ibs 1300 kg

B202

32 mm T track (Sold by meter)

B203

40 mm T track (Sold by meter)

8806

End stop for 20109 T track

2650 lbs 1200 kg 1750 lbs 800 kg

5500 Ibs 2500 kg 3850 Ibs 1750 kg

B807

End stop for 20200 T track

B808

End slop for 20300 T track

These unique tootblocks feature a spring loaded back which allows the block to be pulled open with one hand for fast sheet changes. Ten sizes of opening foot blocks are offered for use on boats from 20 to 70 feet (6 to 21 m). The 8165 does not open. The large diameter sheaves are designed to protect sheets and reduce friction to a minimum. The sheaves are self-contained and ride on a double race of ball bearings. To prevent galling, balls are alternately stainless steel and Delrin. Housings are hard anodized aluminum and the blocks may be disassembled for service without being removed from the deck. 5718" and 7%" (150 mm and 200 mm) footblocks are available by special order with stainless steel sheaves for use with wire. Spskl Fmm Spring loaded opening back Large diameter sheaves Stainless steel ball bearings

Part NO.

OIIuipllmn

8165

Single m-opening

82367

Single

B2368

Double

B2113

Single

B2114

Double

B3113

Single

ShW Oimmar

M u Lim siza

M" 12 mm

tm~Ih 3'18''

If."

70 mm

12 mm

80 mm 3%95 mm

2%" 70 mm 3W' 100 mm

W 12 mm

3W 95 mm

50 mm

2%"

31Vtd'

Y16"

14 mm

V,$'

100 mm

14 mm

4'Vls" 125 mm

W 16 mm

5'h"

140 mm

5%."

140 mm 61'l!6" 170 mm

M8ipN

Walphl

Wmrklnp Lad

f l r l

FUhrr

4410 lbs 2000 kg 6173 lbs 2800 kg

3x'h"FH 3x6mmFH

45 mm

284 g

10 oz

2205 lbs l000 kg

38 mm

!'h"

1 4 8 02 411 g

3086lb 1400 kg

2%" 58 mm

21'1t oz 610 g

6173 lbs 2800 kg

l'%6"

33% oz 9% g

3086 lbs 1400 kg 4409 l b 2000 kg

l x Yls" FH & 2 x 'h" FH IxBmmFH&2x6mmFH Ix%s"FH&2x'h"FH Ix8mmFH&2x6mmFH

8818 lbs 4000 kg

3x8mmFH

1.35 kg

47'k oz

4409 lbs 2M10 kg

B818 lbs 4000 kg

3x%TFH 3xBmmFH

51 oz

8377 lbs

16755 lbs 7600 kg

3xWFH 3 X 10 mm FH

46 mm

2'Yd

72 mm I

50 mm

1.45 kg

3800 kg

3x%d'FH

B3114

Double

B3405

Single

B3406

Dauble

B3407

Single

B3408

Double

Shun D,r

Mar Urn Sia

WBC~

W~IW

4'511e" 125 mm 58" 150 mm 58" 150 mm 7%" 200 mm

#" 16 mm

6"h< 170 mm

38" 80rnm Pl?s" 55 mm 3%' 85 mm 2'31" 72 mm 4%"

78 oz 2.21 kg 92 oz 2.6 kg 111 02 3.15 kg 152 02 4.3 kg 190 02

'h-

18 mm

200mm 71' 200 mm 10'h" 260 mm 10'h"

18 mm K 20 mm

Sal8 workino

eioklg Slr8n,,h

Fumrnn

8377 lbs 3800 kg 13669 Ibs 6200 kg 13669 lbs 6200 kg 19841 Ibs 9000 kg 19841 lbs

16755 lbs 7600 kg 27337 lbs 12400 kg 27337 lbs 12400 kg 39683 lbs 18000 kg 39683 lbs

3xWFH 3xlOmmFH 3 x H " FH 3 x 12 mm FH 3 x 'h" FH 3x12mmFH 5 x B" FH 5x12mmFH 5 x %" FH

h i . . . .

Harken stay tensioners are reliable mechanical adjusters which are used by many of the world's top boat builders. They are easy to install, simple to use and are extremely strong. For smaller offshore boats they are the only good choice for a powerful backstay adjuster. Large cruising boats find stay tensioners preferable to hydraulics for their simplicity, reliability and good looks. Made of polished stainless steel, Harken stay tensioners feature bronze w o n gears and thread drives to prevent galling under load. The moving components are mounted on greased roller bearings for easy adjustment under all conditions. There are four sizes of stay tensioners available for boats from 27 to 50 feet (8 to 15 m) with backstays from '1s" to '12'' (5 to 12 mm). The two smaller adjusters feature handles which fold down for adjusting and up to store alongside the body of the tensioner. The larger two tensioners accept a standard winch handle for adjustment. In addition to use on backstays, stay tensioners are frequently used on other systems such as inner forestays and babystays. By special order the 500 and 501 are available in custom lengths to fit unusual requirements.

SF/I/ h h S Polished stainless steel bodies Bronze w o n gear and thread drive Simple, reliable mechanism No exposed thread 158

Ourripllon

B1834 S.mall stay tensloner wlhandles B1722 Large stay tensimer wlhandles B500 Small stay tensions fw winch handle B501 Largestay tensianer far winch handle

PlllDPln ~onp~h ~ C M

1 5 W 5%" %" 400 mm 140 mm 10 mm 18'1.6'k" 'h" 465 mm 160 mm 12 mm 22%" 7" h 570 mm 180 mm 16 mm 25%" 8"hs" W 640 mm 220 mm 19 mm

'176" 11 mn %6 13 mm h" 15 mm %" 19 mm

Mar W Win W O W ~ SB LMd 56% oz 1'". 2645 Ibs 20 mm 1.6 k g 5 mm 1200 k g I 113 oz 'W 5732 lbs 25 mm 3.2 kg 6 mm 2600 kg lalle" 159 oz W 8377 lbs 30 mm 4.51 kg 10 mm 3800 kg 1 W 292 02 'h" 14330 Ibs 35 mm 8.28 kg 12 mm 6500 kg

WIN

!E2 5291 Ibs 2400 kg 11464 lbs 5200 kg 16755 lbs 7WO kg 28660 Ibs 13000 k g d

POWER SHEET JAMMERS

H a r k e n sheet jammers feature a double control system. The small hand lever allows the jammer t o be opened under light loads. A winch handle is used to release the jammer under heavy loads. The open top design allows Harken jammers to be used for genoa and spinnaker sheets. The jammer is placed in line between the block and a winch. Sheets may be forced down into the jaws to take the load off the winch. The jaws remain open until the lip of the winch socket is pressed, whereupon they snap closed. The low profile, compact size, and the fact that the hand lever does not protrude beyond the base virtually eliminate the possibility of fouling sheets. Power sheet jammers are available in two sizes in Hardkote anodized aluminum or chromed bronze. Polished bronze is available by special order. Spclrl Features Winch handle release for heavv loads Hand ever release for l~gntloads Ava able as port or slarward models

- ~ - -

B1773AR Large aluminum sheet jammer (stbd) B1773CR Large chrome sheet jammer (slbd) 81773AL Large aluminum sheet jammer (port)

81773CL Large chmme sheet jammer (port)

6" l ' 251!i' 39 oz %C 'h 5500 lbs 150 mm l00 mm 56 mm 1.1 kg 14 mm 22 mm 2500 kg 4 6" 3'Vta" 23lta" 113 or '11s'' '/C 7150 lbs 150 mm l00 mm 56 mm 3.2 kg 14 mm 22 mm 3250 kg 4 6" 150mm

3'%i l00 mm

6" 150 mm

3'11~< l00 mm

Small aluminum sheet 4 ' h jammer (stbd) 108 mm B1866CR Small chmme sheet 4 jammer (slbd) 108 mm 81866AL Small aluminum sheel 4'k' jammer (port) l 0 8 mm B1866CL Small chmme sheet 4'k' B1866AR

39 oz '/C 5500 lbs 56 mm 1.1 kg 14 mm 22 mm 2500 kg 4

l 0 mm

l0mm

2Jlta"

Z511C 113 oz

g'' 7150 Ibs 14 mm 22 mm 3250 kg 4 x l 0 mm V %C 3300 lbs l 0 mm 14 mm 1500 kg 4x8mm W %d' 4400 ibs l 0 mm 14 mm 2000 kg 4 x 8 m m

56 mm 3.2 kg 3 1%" 16 oz 75 mm 44 mm 4509 3 1%" 46 oz 75 mm 44mm 1.3 kg 3 1K ' 16 oz V %C 3300 lbs 75 mm 44 mm 450 g l 0 mm 14 mm 1500 kg 4 X 8 mm 3 Ilk' 46 oz '/>a" 4400 lbs

SPINNAKER PO1E END Fl77"NGS

H a k e n offers a wide range of spinnaker pole end fittings in metric sizes. All pole ends are hard anodized aluminum with stainless steel pistons and pins. Piston tvoe ends are ideal for the outboard end of and for the inboard end of poles for small and mid sized offshore boats. They offer internal and external release levers. The 81471100,81481100 and 81491100 are automatic with a trigger mechanism which holds the piston open until the guy is inserted, at which time they automatically close. Bell end fittings are popular on medium and large boats which dip pole jibe. The bell and socket arrangement is very strong, easy to engage, and allows the pole to articulate properly in all conditions. The E1411100 is a socket end stud for the inboard end of poles for boats to 55 feet (17m). This fittina" features a recessed hand ie~easelever. Toggle track slides accept bells and are available with or without pin stops. Pole ends also fit appropriate adjustable spinnaker pole cars shown on page 96. ~~~~~~

160

0130

8120 8130

Large bell socket Small bell socket

61 20

82 mm 86 mm

168 mm 154 mm

85 mm 80 mm

850 g 650 g

8121 Series bell studs 8131 Series bell studs

8276A 8276A 82768 B348A 83488

Track be11 Track slida slida for for bell Track slida for bell wlstop Track slida for bell Track slider for bell wlslop

95 mm 95 mm 95 mm 95 mm

35 mm 35 mm 35 mm 35 mm

500 g 550 g 540 g

470 g

B215 track 8215 track 8216 track 8216 track

Pad NO.

F Pole DD

H G Pole el ; ; ; ; :P

Weigh1

Fils

8131150

Bell end for pole

50 mm

46 mm

85 mm

220 g

0130 bell socket

8131160

Bell end for pole

60 mm

55 mm

85 mm

350 g

0130 bell socket

8131170

Bell end for pole

70 mm

65 mm

85 mm

440 g

B130 bell socket

8131180 B121170

Bell end for pole Bell end for pole

80 mm 70 mm

75 mm 65 mm

85 mm 110 mm

540 g 360 g

B130 bell socket 8120 bell socket

8121180

Bell end for pole

80 mm

75 mm

110 mm

460 g

8120 bell socket

81211100 10

Bell end for pole Bell end for pole

100 mm

94 mm

110 mm

670 g

l 0 0 mm

92 mm

360 mm

4.54 kg

Pan NO.

Descri~tion

Description

F Pole

H Length ID S!PI Pole

8120 bell socket 8140 bell socket wlstud

I Jaw Width

Weight

8141150 8145160

Plston pole end

50 mm

46 mm

93 mm

20 mm

370 g

Plston pole end

60 mm

55 mm

146mm

8145170

Plston pole end

70 mm

65 mm

175 mm

28 mm 30 mm

820g 1 4 kg

8145180

Plston pole end

80 mm

75 mm

175 mm

30 mm

81471100

Plston oole end wltr~oaer ""

100 mm

94 mm

134 mm

36 mm

1 5 kg 1 3 3 ka

B1481100 81491100

Stainless piston end wltrlgger Stalniess pston end wltrlgger

100 mm

94 mm

140 mm

32 mm

2 27 kg

100 mm

92 mm

230 mm

32 mm

3 32 kg

Harken H-2000. The boat shoe that The Harken H-2000 boat shoe is designed for sailors who take their sport seriously. Warren Luhrs, skipper of Thursday's Child which shaved eight days off of the New York to San Francisco record set by Flying Cloud in 1854, says, "The Harken H-2000's performed better and held up longer than traditional boat shoes under the rigors of our two and one-half month voyage. Traction was excellent and the snug fit gave a feeling of security when working on a slanting, pitching, water-soaked deck. The built-in arch support made the long hours on watch much more comfortable." The H-2000 is the original full support performance boat shoe. Engineered for comfort and support, it offers features that no other boat shoe can match. From the tenacious grip of the Waverider'" sole to the comfort of athletic shoe construction, the H-2000 is a shoe designed for the realities of boating. Contoured .~ ~- bnsale helos reduce ooor an0 fealures m q-e wake channel 10 disperse moisture and allows air to flow through ~~

Available with red or grey wave accents in women's sizes: blue or grey accents in mm's sim.

Machine washable.

Padded closed cell foam tongue adds comfon, conforms to foot, does not absorb water and aids in

Specially tanned suede leather

Mesh wtouts provide ventilation and added

Exclusive Waverids sole is constructed of two hardnesses of rubber and is filled with EYA foam for flexibility and foot suppon.

162

SCOOW01. backstay reolces shoe Dac* nelgnt f w greater comfon yet allows maximum quarter

started it all! The unique Waverider'" sole, which utilizes two different hardnesses of rubber, is raised in the toe for added protection with small ribs to protect the stitching around the sole. A nonabsorbent EVA foam is used for padding in the tongue. Small straps on the sides of the tongue keep it centered.

Another problem that can occur from not wearing socks is heel abrasion. This has been solved by utilizing a soft crushed nylon material on the inside of the shoe, scalloping the heel, and changing the heel counter angle.

vents allow increased airflow around the toe to keep the toe sailorsfrequentlydo area cool and comfortable. not wear socks, foot odor can be a problem. The removable inner sole, which is ventilated and ribbed, virtually eliminates odor.

since

The women's H-2000 is available in two stylish color combinations: white with red and pink wave accents or white with grey accents. The men's H-2000 is available in 4 two color Five aptional laces available combinations: white with blue wave accents or white with grey accents. The Harken H-2000. Designed to perform. And look good doing it.

A n improved tanning process makes the leather more waterproof, and a slightly darker leather color helps hide dirt better.

Doscription

Description

2000 Men.s grey boat shoe Men's shoes are available in medium width in US sues 6 to 14 with K sizeSfrOm6'1~through I l ' h .

2006 Blue laces - one pair

2001 Men.s blue

2007 Red laces - one pair

shoe Men's shoes are available in medium width in US s12eS 6 to 14 with K Sizes lrcin6'1~through 11%

2002 Optional lace 5 pack

2010 Women's red boat shoe

Women's shoes are available in medium width in US sizes 5 to 11 wlth 'h sizes from 5 through 10'k.

2003 Yellow laces -one pair

2011 Women's grey boat shoe

Women's shoes are available in medium width in US sizes 5 to 11 with 'h slzes from 5 through 10'h.

2004 Lilac laces - one pair

2012 Men's replacement insole

2005 Green laces - one pair

2013 Women's replacement m o l e

I Offshore

One-Design

Offshore

otfshore

PROMOTIONAL ITEMS

Sail

"Harken Offshore" T-shirt features a silhouette of an offshore race! working to windward. The "One Design" T-shirt shows hot action with both crew trapezing. The "Harken Sail" T-shirt captures your boat obscured by a wave. T-shirts are available in medium, large and extra-large.

popular demand wenow offer our once elusive^-shirts, hats, shorts, sweatshirts and sweaters to the public. They're great for wearing around the water, or even around town, and make tenific crew gifts.

T-shirts: Three T-shirts are available, each with a distinctive Harken logo. T-shirts are top quality 100% cotton with the Harken logo on the front left chest and the main design on the back. 164

SweaIshirts: Sweatshirts come in three colors, each with a specific design. Choose navy with the " H a m Sail", wildberry with the "Harken Offshore" design or jade with the "Harken One-Design" motif. Sweatshirts are 50% cotton/50% polyester and are available in small, medium, large, and extra-large.

Sweaters: We offer four 100% Orlon sweaters, each embroidered with the Harken logo. Sizes are small, medium, large, extra-large and XXL,

Polo Shirfs: Six 100% cotton polo shirts are available. Polo shirts with pockets are available with the Harken logo on the front right chest. Polo shirts without pockets are available with the Harken logo on the sleeve. Polo shirts are available in medium, large, extra-large and XXL.

Harken Hats: Harken hats are bright enough to qualify as safety aids but they're also stylish and shade your face so you can trim for hours without eye fatique. Hats are available in hot pink with a lime Harken logo or lime with a hot pink Harken logo. One size fits all.

Crew Shirfs: Lightweight long sleeved crew shirts are made of 100% cotton sheeting. Shirts are white with hot pink or green accent stripes and the Harken logo. Sleeves and waist are ribbed. Available in small, medium, large, extra-large and XXL.

Crew Shorfs: Harken logo crew shorts are an action cut available in either lined or unlined styles. They are 100% nylon and come in either hot pink or lime in small, medium, large, extra-large and : ~ - ~ ~

Micro Block dewsky Harken offers a selection of miniature hardware designed and built by model boat maker Dean Derusha of Marinette, Wisconsin. Harken block jewelry consists of finely detailed scale miniatures of Harken blocks, winches, and furling systems which will tell the world that you're a serious sailor. The charms are a must for anyone with a nautical charm bracelet Hardware charms and pendants are supplied with a ring for attachment to bracelets, charm bracelets or neck chains. Bracelets and chains are not included. The two styles of earrings (both for pierced ears only) are supplied with wires.

l l

actual size.

Micro Block Ksy Rim: Until now you had to go to a boat show to find Harken micro block key rings. The real micro block with ball bearing sheave comes with a stainless steel ring and will hold 12 keys. The block makes a great spare - in case you need an emergency replacement for your flag halyard -but it does not float.

Harkon Cups: These sailing cups should be the official cup for use on your boat. Dishwasher safe plastic is virtually unbreakable. They're great for sipping a cold one after a hard day of sailing. 16 oz (300 ml) size.

2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348

S~nglemlcm block charmlpendanl Double mtcm block charmlpendant Tnple mlcro block charmlpendant Small becket runner block charmlpendant Large becket runnet block charmlpendant Small spreacher block charmlpendant Large spreacher block charmlpendant Small bronze wlnch charmlpendant Small chmme wlnch charmlpendant

Rn no. 2349

2 x 0 .. . . 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 236 2357

Mea m . bronze w~ncncnam!penoan! Me0 .m cnrome ... . .~ .w ncn . cnarm~oenoant . .~ r~~

Large bronze winch chamlpendant Large chrome winch chamlpendant Furling unit charrnlpendant Large becket runner block earring with ear loop Large spreacher block with ear loop Micro block key ring 16 oz (300 ml) cups (one dozen)

Wlctor Fm'Far, 50 Carat was wtblted pnmady with Ha&n rtandardpoductr but custom andspecial products wwe built to meet t i x many rpeCid1 m&sol thls w l l know boat

3 CUSTOM & LIMITED PRODUCTION 1 A s racing boats become more specialized and cruising yachts become larger and more automated, the demand for custom and special products has grown substantially. While other manufacturers have frowned at requests for "one off" projects, we have responded by forming a special Custom Division within our company.

system streamlines the design process. A plasma cutter, wire EDM cutter, and computer driven machining centers allow rapid turnaround of one-off projects with all of the quality you've come to expect of Harken. The most successful custom projects are refined and offered as standard hardware so that the general sailing public benefits from the development work performed by our Custom Division. The lessons we learn in Custom have resulted in significant development of new products and manufacturing techniques. Whether you need one part, or one hundred, Harken has the engineering expertise, creative production methods, and attention to detail required to solve your problem.

organized as a special resource center to work with our distributors and customers on special projects. The personnel in Newport are familiar with big boat projects and are capable of specifying the correct hardware. They are aided by special CAD systems, which are devoted to preparing deck layouts for special projects using our E-Z Deck software. Special Sheaves

Special Pmjmfs Designers and builders of large custom mcir and cruising boats have very specialized requirements. Our distributors are capable of (Isr:ol n gr 2ac na ,am soea.e rnon ng roe -0 I,?. np r d oear ngr an" T?l!0, rrwcgmrea a. m "p ror n i)n aanc

Leny Post plasma cuffing curtom t!tanium ridWlates

We have four engineers and designers devoted strictly to custom projects and a crew of machinists and metalworkers whose sole responsibility is producing custom hardware. Our CAD (Computer Aided Design)

Paul Vanden Heuveld! the Pewaukee office CAD systm

meeting most of these needs. In addition, our Newport, Rhode Island sales office has been

There is always a demand for sheaves other than those offered in our standard line. From quarter tonners to maxi boats, there are times when a special diameter, unusual groove shape or custom width is required. Most retrofits in existing spars or fittings require custom sheaves. We have built sheaves in diameters ranoino from 2" (51 mm) to 18" ( 4 5 7 k i ) and in widths from %" (12 mm) to 1%" (38 mm). 167

Custom sheaves are available with either balllroller combination bearings or with hiload bearings which feature side load canying balls with composite bushings.

Tnwk Car ModIIIuIInn The recirculating ball bearing traveler is an

Vang car &ly

lor rk Whllbread b a t Sal1 Ireland

Standard 670srand up Mock M removable padeys.

changed to build a fitting that more precisely meets a customer's needs. While demand seldom justifies offering these parts as standard, we are happy to modify standard hardware to meet your special requirements.

@lime--

- -

Rudder brrrings While our range of production bearings will suit most boats, we continue to offer custom rudder bearings for boats with unusual shafts or mounting requirements. Large boats have required huge self-aligning bearings, some

Mainsheel car lraln W n g lour m;c a r ~bull lw the 120 loot UAP Anlarclica.

incredibly versatile piece of hardware. We have adapted our cars to suit many diverse needs. Boats from 12 Meters and maxis to small dinghys use Harken travelers, either standard or custom, as vangs. We have built spinnaker pole cars for boats of all sizes. Racing boats and cruising boats with roller furling mainsails often use our cars for the outhaul. The enormous multihulls of Europe

have used Harken traveler cars for their headboards and batten end sliders to overcome the tremendous friction inherent in these systems. ModIIIcd Prpduclion Hmiwrr Many times a small boat or big boat production fitting can be modified, assembled in a different order, or have parts inter-

l 0 . 6 W sell-al;pw m&bea"q w;fh h t q a l r h a l t wal for K t m 80 Milene. NW haw givm the 6oaf & lw@ i wnsiveoers

equipped with integral, low friction shaft seals. We will also modify standard rudder bearings to fit odd sized shafts. For a quotation on custom or modified rudder bearings, please forward the information requested on page 72.

Ex msnsheefM the a m m e J Boat Shamrock ms a special dwble m

168

n 01 W 8 hangiog block

s m i 4 Sysirrns After we entered the steering field with the introduction of rudder bearings it became apparent that many other components in big boat steering systems needed refinement. We have built a number of steering heads for boats ranging from maxi boats and 12 Meters to IOR boats as small as 41 feet (12.5 m). These heads feature low friction bearing systems and are a perfect complement to our rudder bearings and steering sheaves. Heads are available with lightweight pedestals. Our custom steering wheels are incredibly strong for their weight and feature a unique tuhine blade appearance. We have produced

l4 Cffitm steering system oo NIM 45 Insatiable. Steering head and pedestals with bionacle mount were &signed to meet ownetPpre3x r e w m t s .

wheels ranging in size from 3 6 (1 m) to 84" (2.44 m). Wheels are Hardkote anodized with ~ e f l o nimpregnation and feature a special synthetic wrap which gives excellent grip even in cold, wet conditions. When trying to remove weight from the back of a boat, the quadrant cannot be ignored. Our rudder quadrants are aluminum weldments which are very light for their size and strength.

Finally, we offer low friction shaft seals to eliminate the friction caused by conventional stuffing boxes. These seal units use a special seal element which can be adjusted for tensioning and to compensate for wear.

LIMITED PRODUCTIOX ITEMS Our custom department has many des~gns that have proven popular on a number of boats but do not generate the volume necessary to justify building on a production basis. These items are designed and waiting to be ordered. Delivery times vary but can be as low as four weeks for simple products or as long as ten weeks for a limited production steering system. Complete specifications, prices, and details are available upon request.

ML!/@/8 skepva D8ck O r g ~ i z a r ~ We offer two, three and four sheave big boat deck organizers as standard hardware in the catalog. Some boats require organizers with more sheaves, either to route more lines aft or for use behind a stopper bank to permit using winches on either side of the boat. We

have designed our tooling so that organizers with more sheaves are available from the custom department on a limited production basis with four week lead time. Our largest organizer to date had nine sheaves. Each additional sheave adds approximately 2%" (70 mm) to overall length and 8 oz (230 g) to overall weight. steeling sysI#m Of all of the steering systems we've built, the C856 has proven to be the most popular. This simple double A lrame system supports a wheel up to 7 2 (1.83 m) in diameter and is suitable for boats to 42' (12.8 m). Mark Lindsay has used five of these systems on the Taylor 40's. This system is available in less than ten weeks. Drawings and details will be provided upon request. Steeling Whecls One of the most popular custom products we build is the large diameter, lightweight steering wheel. These wheels are black anodized aluminum with a very distinctive

I Five and eight sheave orpn~zersare W on the catalq versim fowd on page 53.

space age "turbine blade" spoke pattern. The unique hub design allows us to build wheels ranging from 60" (1.52 m) to 8 4 (2.13 m) off of the same hub design. This flexibility means shorter delivery times and lower costs. Bill Lee uses a 72" (1.83 m) or 8 4 (2.13 m) wheel on every Santa Cruz 70. Mark Lindsay uses a 60" (1.52 m) wheel on the Taylor 40 and the first of Barry Carroll's Frers 45's is equipped with a 6 2 (1.57 m) wheel.

Maxi G m L& Maxi Boats require specialized genoa lead cars but our designs have evolved into two standard designs. The C1771 features a removable sheave carrier while the C1678 is a basic car with a pivoting carrier.

C1678 Maxi lead car C1771 Maxi lead car

C1678 maxi lead car features apvoting titanium sheave carierand large diameter sheave.

C1771 m i l e a d car has a removable sheave cam and k vwpoputw lor Y3 genoas

I" 11' I O W 95W Ibs 19WO lbs Weight 178 or l 7 8 mm 278 mm 270 mm 4303 kg 8618 kg (5.05 kg) 5

10"

11.

85W lbr 17WO lbr Weiht 134 oz

C1771 with sheave cari~removed

C1647pivobng low lead bloch

Low Lead B/& The titanium pivoting low lead block has proven very popular for a variety of applications. These blocks are typically used for foreguys and mainsheets where very low leads are desirable. The sheave is mounted close to the deck and the line exits through the pivot tube only 'h" (6 mm) above the deck. Pivoting low lead blocks are available with 3 (76 mm), 4 (102 mm), and 6 (152 mm) hi-load sheaves.

lead block

76 mm 152 mm 102 mm 2268 kg

4536 kg FH lastenen

C1507 Pivoting low 6250 lbs 12500 lbr Use three W (10 mm) lead block 102 mm 152 mm 127 mm 2835 kg 5670 kg FH lastenw C1647 Pivotinglaa 6 97%" 7%" 150W lbr 30WOlbr Ureeighl W (1Omm) lead block 152 mm 251 mm 197 mm 6804 ko 13608 ko FH fastwen

non MCCW m m Plvol~nglow lead bhck bemg used for r p , ~ a k w p o l eforeguy Llne w t s lhrwgh prvol tube and a held very close m fhe d&

1 COMPU-SPEC 1 Harken Compu-Spec'" is a software program available to dealers, d~stributors,designers and other marine industry professionals who are interested in choosing the correct hardware for their customers. The Harken Compu-Spec is an expert program which will choose the correct Harken hardware for each system on a boat based on the nature and dimensions of the boat. The program offers multiple layers of discretion to the operator so that hardware systems can be tailored to the specific needs of your customer. Harken Compu-Spec software is designed to select hardware for offshore boats from 22 to 70 feet. While the program will choose hardware for other boats, owners and designers of exotic boats and very large boats should consult Harken when selecting hardware. Hardware systems which this program will select include: Mainsheet Travelers and Controls Mainsheet Systems Genoa Lead Cars and Tracks Genoa Foot Blocks Spinnaker Sheet, Afterguy. and Foreguy Running Backstay Blocks Mast Base Lead Blocks Rudder Bearings and Steering Sheaves Winches Furling Systems Shoes Harken Compu-Spec will generate a data sheet showing loads on some common hardware systems and describing different sail areas. When hardware is selected, Harken Compu-Spec will print the selections in several formats. These include printouts organized by

' '-2

DECK SOFTWARE

Harken E-Z Deck'" is a software package available on a limited basis to design professionals. E-Z Deck is a menu driven program which works in conjunction with AutoCADe software (Release 9 or more current) to enable designers to lay out deck and sail plans with properly drawn and scaled Harken fittings and winches. For customers who do not use AutoCAD but have a DXF translator for their CAD software we can offer DXF files with a library of Harken parts. The ability to lay out hardware systems using scaled hardware from a library of properly drawn parts saves considerable time, results in a very impressive drawing, and allows the designer to experiment with various hardware layouts on his deck plan. E-Z Deck also includes the unique Spline program which permits drawing of very fair curves with minimal effort. E-Z Deck will allow drawing straight or radiused track as a simple line which will automatically be adjusted to a standard length of track when desired. E-Z Deck will also automatically generate a bill of materials for ordering purposes when purchased with the Harken Compu-Spec'" hardware selection program. E-Z Deck requires some specific hardware and software requirements and does not include AutoCAD software. There is a nominal charge for E-Z Deck and Harken reserves the right to restrict distribution of E-Z Deck. Contact Harken for details and allow up to 6 weeks for delivery. E-Z Deck is part number 1787.

hardware system; organized numerically for ordering; and with weights and strengths of the components. Printouts will also price the hardware selected. All Harken Cornpu-Spec printouts include the name of the dealer, distributor, or designer. Harken Compu-Spec is available for MS-DOS and UNlX computer systems. Harken Compu-Spec must be tailored to your computer system so delivery takes up to six weeks. For further information, or to order Harken Compu-Spec, call or write Harken The Harken Compu-Spec software package includes instructions and is part number 1788. Compu-Spec will be available after January 1990.

System 1

system 3

The most common mainsheet on boats under twenty-eight feet (8.5 m) is a four part tackle. Very small boats will use a 060 and 053 while larger boats will use a 042 and 028. Both systems feature ratchets and adjustable cam cleats.

As mainsails get larger, the purchase required to trim increases tremendously. A powerful purchase is slow in light air or downwind so dual purchase mainsheets have become popular. In this example, a 6:1 tackle using a 051 is used for fast trimming while the fine tune tackle of little fiddle blocks gives 24:1 power for upwind work.

System 2

System 4

Placing the mainsheet off the traveler car with a 009 ratchet on a 144 base allows adjustment of the main without dragging the car to windward. It tends to tighten the leech but this can be overcome by curving the track ends up. Boom blocks are 2 . 2 5 for boats under twenty-eight feet (8.5 m) or 3.00" plastic blocks for boats to thirty-five feet ( l 0 m) which usually use a 6:l tackle.

A refinement of the gross trimlfine tune system is a dinghy-like double ended tackle which puts the sheet on thecockpit sides.

I MAINSHEET SYSTEMS

System 5

Mainsheets are simple hardware systems, but they are among the most important as they are in almost constant use. There is no one correct mainsheet for every boat. The best choice depends on the size of the boat, the configuration of the deck and cabin house, the prevailing wind, the number and strength of the crew and the owner's preferences. Some typical mainsheet systems are pictured. Use these sketches as a starting point for designing a system for your boat.

External fine tune systems tighten the leech as the car is moved off the centerline. Placing the fine tune in the boom solves this and cleans up the cockpit. This system for boats under thirty-five feet ( l 0 m) has a 3:l gross trim with the fine tune leading to a 185 on the boom so the trimmer can stay on the rail. Larger boats use a 5:1 gross trim using a 051

System 6

System 7

This fine tune system features a 5:l tackle with cam with the tail led to a winch for heavy air work. Boats under thirty-nine feet (11.9 m) use 3 . 0 0 plastic blocks while larger boats use mid-range or big boat blocks.

This is the most popular system on cruising boats. The block on the traveler car is a 008. The blocks on the boom and gooseneck are 01 1s and a 014 is used to lead the sheet around the companionway. Boats over forty feet (12.1 m) will use mid-range or big boat blocks.

System 8

System 9

Thts double ended system is very popular and very simple. It leaves the trimmer on the high side. The mainsheet must run very freely through the blocks to allow the traveler to move easily. Free rolling 3 . 0 0 and 4.00" big boat blocks are used on this system.

Double ended systems using mainsheet sheave carriers are popular because there are no loose blocks to bang about in a jibe. Boats with mains to 450 ft2 (42 m2) use the 584 while boats with mains to 600 It2 (56 m2) use the 586. Both join two 515 cars and incorporate the control tackle.

System 10

System 11

The German Admiral's Cup boats first popularized this system where the sheet leads forward along the boom before turning aft to the winches. The traveler is independent of the mainsheet so it rolls freely. The sheet makes lots of turns so free rolling blocks are a must. One tonners use 3 . 0 0 big boat blocks, often with a 4 . 0 0 big boat block on the car.

Many large boats use a simple system where a block on the deck turns the sheet to a winch. Fifty-five footers ( l 5 m) use 4.50" blocks while seventy footers (21 m) use 5.50" blocks.

System l 209 and 210 cars feature 200 Cam-Matic cleats so installation involves simply bolting the track to the deck and providing a 073 eyestrap for deadending the control lines. The cleats are on adjustable arms so they can be angled to best suit your boat: flush deck boats will face the cleats down the length of the track while boats with seat backs will generally angle the cleats aft.

System 2 The 21 1 , 212 and 247 windward sheeting traveler cars are extremely simple to mount as a 2:l system. The car includes the cleats so installation involves mounting the track and providing a deadend for the control line on a 073 eyestrap. A patented slider mechanism allows these cars to be pulled to windward without releasing the leeward control line. If the boat is tacked, the car stays in place and can be pulled to the new windward side, again without releasing the leeward control line.

System 3 The 211, 212 and 247 windward sheeting traveler cars can be installed with a 3:l control tackle by starting the line at the becket tube provided and using either a 255 or 092 at the track end. The 608 and 609 can be installed with either 5:l or 6:l controls. For 5:1 controls deadend the line on a 563. Fa 6:l controls use a 736 or three 132's at the track end

System 4 This simple 2:l system has the line deadended on a 073 eyestrap. a 157, 159, or 214 car with integral sheaves and the cleats mounted facing outboard. Popular on flush deck boats like the J/24 where the crew sits outboard of the traveler, this system can also be built using 171, 172, and 215 cars with 082 or 125 bullet blocks on the car for the control lines.

TRAVELER SYSTEMS I

Traveler controls should be powerful enough to move the car easily under load and led to a position where the crew can operate them conveniently. Smaller boats usually position the controls so that the helmsman can make the adjustment while larger boats will position the controls for the mainsheet trimmer.

Purchase Recommendations lor Traveler Conlrols Sail Area Conlrol Purchase Under l50 ft2 2:l 150 - 250 ft2 3:l 275 - 450 ftz 4:l 450 - 600 ft2 6:l Over 600 ft2 Winch

System 5 A 3:l system with cleats on the track is popular on boats under thirty-five feet (10.67 m). Boats to twenty-six feet (7.5 m) use a 215 car fitted with 083 blocks and 259 and 260 control blocks with cleats at the track ends. Boats over twenty-eight feet (8.5 m) use 1514 blocks on either a 1508 or 1509 car and 1520 and 1521 control blocks with cleats at the track ends.

System 6 A 3:l system is popular on many racing boats to thirty-five feet (10.67 m). The turning block on the end of the track can be a 1516 single sheave control block or a 017 (018) little Hexaratchet cheek block which allows the trimmer to ease the car under control in heavy gusts. The cleats face outboard to allow the trimmer to sit off the ends of the track.

System 7 The most popular system on moderately sized cruising and racing boats is a 4:l tackle with the control blocks and cleats mounted on the track ends. This tackle consists of two 063 or 1515 blocks on the car and a 564 and 565 control block assembly at the track ends. 631 or 632 trim caps finish the track ends. Boats with sail areas greater than 400 ft2 (40 m2) should use 734 and 735 control blocks.

System 8 When the traveler is mounted ahead of the companionway, it is often convenient to place the cleats at the after edge of the cabin house so the crew does not have to reach forward to move the traveler car. Use 563 or 733 control blocks on the track ends with 150 Cam-Matic cleats on the cabin house. A 240 swivel cam cleat will allow the crew to control the car from various positions in the cockpit.

System 9 On boats like the Tartan 10 the crew generally sits on the deck outside of the cockpit so the control lines are led vertically up the seat back. 147 blocks are used on the car while 223s are mounted on the cockpit seat back to turn the line up to a 150 CamMatic cleat. The cleat should have a 137 fairead eyestrap to contain the line in the cleat.

System 1 A 639 car on 142 or 154 track forms an ideal lead system for boats under 30' (9 m). A 2:1 adjuster tackle composed of a 125 on the car and a 255 control block on the track gives adequate power to move this car under load. The control line leads aft to a little Hexaratchet cheek block, 017 or 018. and then to a 150 Cam-Matic which is positioned to allow adjustment from the high side.

System 2 This is the most common lead car adjuster system and is popular because the adjuster tackle is kept unobtrusively over the track. Boats to 314 ton size use a 1537 car on 1510 or 1535 track. A 4:l tackle is built using a 1515 on the car and a 1519 control block on the front of the track. A 1522 end stop is used on the aft end of the track. Boats to 40' (12 m) use a 587 car on 516. 680 or 785 track with a 4:l tackle composed of a 025 on the car and a 563 on the forward end of the track. A 548 is used at the after end of the track. In both cases the control line leads through a 017 or 018 little Hexaratchet to a 150 Cam-Matic which is positioned for easy adjustment. A shock cord is used to hold the cars to the rear when they are not loaded. In many cases, the shock cord will be led forward along the track by turning it through a 092 cheek block mounted just aft of the track.

'X----

' LEAD CAR SYSTEMS I T h e ability to adjust genoa lead block position under load has become crucial for efficient offshore sailing. Pulling the lead forward allows the racing crew to "power up'' the genoa coming out of tacks or when sailing through lulls. Easing the car aft "depowers" the genoa to keep the boat on its feet in gusts. Cruising sailors use adjustable lead cars with roller reefing genoa systems. As the genoa is reefed, the lead car position must be moved forward to compensate. The ability to adjust lead car position from the safety of the cockpit is more than just a convenience. The sketches below show five adjustment arrangements for adjustable lead cars. All bring the controls back to the cockpit where they are easily adjusted by the trimmer in his normal position. Use these sketches as a basis lor designing a system which is exactly right for your boat.

System 3 When parallel tracks are used, it is usually best to join the cars so that they adjust with one tackle. A single shock cord is used to hold the cars to the rear. The 599 or 703 stops can be used with any system to keep cars from getting away from the crew, to serve as a point of reference or to allow the tackle to be released.

System 4 This system features separate tracks for the #l and #2 genoas and the #3 genoa. A single adjuster tackle, in this case a single line led aft to a winch, moves all four cars. Because the track lengths differ, the cables joining the forward cars are arranged so that the after cars move a distance equal to the difference in track length before the forward cars begin to move.

System 5 A typical two track transverse lead system. The floating block is controlled by a 2:l tackle of 304 wire blocks led aft to a magic box. The cars adjust with a pair of 2:l tackles which are joined to adjust together. Note that both control lines are turned towards the cockpit so that the crew can operate them from the high side of the boat.

System 1

System 2

This system is most often seen on small fractionally rigged boats. The 6:l self-cleating tackle uses a 086 on the backstay and a 095 on the deck. Variations include leading the backstay through the deck and placing a tackle under the stern of the boat. If the lower block is a 087, the cleat can be placed forward near the cockpit.

This is a variation of System 1. A wire block like the 304 is placed at the end of the backstay. A flexible cable runs over the wire block to form a 2:l purchase which is then pulled by a 6:l tackle for a total power of 12:l

System 3

System 4

This is the typical split backstay adjuster. Two 304 wire blocks ride on the legs of the backstay and secure to a stainless steel ring. A 4:l tackle using a 028 and 038 pulls the wire blocks down the backstay, pinching the legs together. The pinching provides mechanical advantage, but it decreases as the tackle is lowered on the legs. A Hexa-Cat may be used to increase power.

A more powerful version of the split backstay adjuster uses a doubling wire running through a 304 wire block on the ring to give a purchase of 8:1

' BACKSTAY ADJUSTER SYSTEMS I

ielephone: (414) 691-3320 Hsrken Easl /Trade Only) One Mill Street N e w p o r t , Rhode Island 0 2 8 4 0 Fax: ( 4 0 1 ) 8 4 1 -5070 Telephone: ( 4 0 1 ) 849-8278

1251 East bvlsconsin Avenue Pewaukee, Wisconsin 53072 USA Telex: 494-0960 Fax: (414) 691-3008

Harken (Shoe - Trade Only) Post Office Box 31 Marblehead. Massachusetts 0 1 9 4 5 Fax: ( 6 1 7 ) 6 3 1 - 8 5 1 6 Telephone: ( 6 1 7) 631-8388

Arpantina Harken Argentina C. Pellegrini 2725 CP. 1702 Ciudadela Norte Argentina Telex: (390) 19052 KlNHAR AR Fax: (54) 1-656-2356 Telephone (54) 1-757-5990 Ausfralis Thomas H. Sutton Ply. Ltd 27 Madeline Street Enfield, N S W . 2136. Australia Fax: (61) 2-642-5537 Telephone: (61) 2-642-1647

Fax: ( 6 1 9 ) 2 2 5 - 1 5 0 8 Telephone: ( 6 1 9 ) 225-1506

South Africa Wilbur Ellis Co. (Pty) Ltd. PO. Box 4258 Cape Town 8000. South Africa Telex: (960) 5-20707 Fax (27) 21 -4174177 Telephone: (27) 21-4174517

Hoiland/Bslglum F H, lmhoff Leimuiderdijk 478a 2156 MX Weteringbrug. Holland F a : (31) 1713-15866 Telephone: (31) 1713-15900

Ourban Telex: (960) 6-22960 Fax: (27) 31-3051899 Telephone: (27) 31-3053381

arilish Virgin Islands R~chardson'sRigging Services P O Box 97, Road Town Tortoia. British Virgin Islands Fax: (809) 494-5436 Telephone: (809) 494-2739 Canada North Sailing Products. Ltd. 2242 Lakeshore Blvd. West Toronto, Ontario. Canada M8V 1A5 Fax: (416) 252-2994 Telephone: (416) 252-7841

Japan Harken Japan Ltd. 2-21-9 Nishlnomiya-Hama Nishinomiya City Hyogo Pref Japan 662 Fax: (81) 798-33-2100 Telephone: (81 ) 798-22-2520

Northwest ~ a n n eDistributors #29 Coal Harbour Whad 566 Cardero Street Vancouver. B C . Canada V6G 2W6 Fax (604) 685-9267 Telephone: (604) 685-7577 Dmnmark Coumbus Trading AIS Naverland 26 B 2600 Glostrup, Denmark Telex: (855) 33648 COLUMB DK F a : (45) 42 63 3459 Telephone: (45) 42 63 3600 Finland Tallberg Nautica OY Karapellontie 11 SF-02610 Espoo. Finland Telex (857) 124 230 TALK1 SF Fax (358) 0-592 491 Telephone: (358) 0-594 510

Malaysia Euro-Am Malaysia Sdn Bhd 60M SS21 158 47400 Petaling Jaya. Malaysia Telex: (784) MA 37039 FCKUL Fax: (60) 3-71 70142 Telephone (60) 3-718 8132 (60) 3-719 1977 New Zealand A . Foster & Company Ltd 30136 Fanshawe Street P.O. Box 1951 Auckland 1. New Zealand Fax: (64) 9-377 987 Telephone (64) 9-3033744 Nonwy HNS Norway A I S Holfsveen 27 021 2 Oslo 2 P 0 Box 271 Skoyen Norway Fax (47) 2-730082 Telephone (47) 2-50350611 41 681

fnN8

Harken France LA. Port des Minimes 17000 - La Rochelle. France Telex: (842) 791240 Fax: (33) 46 4425.70 Telephone: (33) 4644.5120

Harken Italy V i a Ceresio 1 2 2 0 0 7 4 Lomazzo (Como) Italy Fax: ( 3 9 ) 2-963-70-998 Telephone: ( 3 9 ) 2-96-77-90-28

Gme Tecrep Mar~neLtd 38, Akti Mutsopuu 185 36 Plraeus, Greece Telex (863) 211082 TJPI GR Fax (30) 1-4184280 Telephone (30) 1-4521647

How Kong Far East Yacht Specialists Ltd. M 2 Baskervllle House 22 Ice House Street Central. Hong Kong Telex (780) 65925 HX Telephone (852) 5 257015

Austria Peter Prokes G e s m b H. Argentinerstrasse 43 1040 Vienna, Austr~a F a : (43) 222-5054103 Telephone: (43) 222-5057332

Cable: Harken Pewaukee

Harken Wcsl /Tr& Only) 2816 Canon Street S a n Diego, California 92106

Spain Trimer I p m s a

Swsden Rutgerson AB S440 60 Skarhamn Sweden Telex (854) 28399 Fax (46) 304-77247 Telephone (46) 304-77020

United Kfngdom Harken UK Ltd 17 East K~ngStreet Helensburgh Dunbartonshlre. G84 7 0 0 Telex (851) 777582 TELRAY G Fax (44) 436-71697 Telephone (44) 436-71415 Wesl Germany Peter Frisch GmbH Isar-Ring 11 0-8000 Munich 40. West Germany Telex: (841) 528549 FRlSH D Fax: (49) 89-365078 Telephone: (49) 89-365075

0THERHARKENREfRESENTATIVES:~ERMUOA:Pearman.Watlington & Co. Ltd.. P 0. 60x840, Hamilton 5 Telex: (380) 3534. Fax: (809) 292~4489.Telephone (809) 295-3232 lnwater Yacht Management Service. P.O. Box HM600. Hamilton HM CX, Telex: (380) 3246, Telephone: (809) 292-1252 S KORM: Pacific Marlne. 2nd Floor, Aiu Build!ng. 704-5. Banpo-Dong Sucho-Ku, Seoul, Fax: (82) 2-548-0246, Telephone: (82) 2-549-522112 Ti1WAN:Mercuiy Marine Supply C o . 5F:4 No. 22. Tsu W e 4th Road, L'i, Ya. 80212 Kaohs~ung,Telex: (785) 71612, Fax: (886) 7-331-4232, Telephone (886) 7-331-7293 TRINIOA0:Thomas Peake & Co. Ltd.. 177 Western Main Road, Port.ofSpain, Fax. (809) 622-4295. Telephone: (809) 622-429314 TURKEY: Kompozit Marin. Kemeralti Caddesi N o 67, Karakoy, Telex (821) 24813. Fax: (90) 1-144-635:. Telephone: (90) 1-149-8449. 187

1251 East Wisconsin Avenue Pewaukee, Wisconsin 53072 Telephone - (414)691-3320 Telex - 494-0960 HARKEN Cable - Harken, Pewaukee F ~ -x (414) 691-3008

1990

Articles inside

Bases

3.00" Fiddle Blocks Hexa-Cats"

3.00" Hexa-Cats

Magic Boxes

Little Hexa-Cats